JP2019097617A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: A variable winning device 401 including a first winning hole part 403, a second winning hole part 404, and an opening/closing member capable of opening or closing the first winning hole part and the second winning hole part is provided in a game area. A first opening/closing plate 432 for opening or closing the first winning hole part and a second opening/closing plate 433 capable of receiving game balls in a state for closing the first winning hole part are provided in the opening/closing member. When the opening/closing member changes from a state for opening the first winning hole part to a state for closing it, game balls received by the second opening/closing plate can enter the second winning hole part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 26

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A game machine such as a pachinko machine is known to provide, for example, a bonus such as a payout of a game ball based on the ball entry means provided in the game area or the ball entry of the game ball to the ball entry unit. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, a device for increasing the degree of attention to the game is desired.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
A launcher capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first ball entry unit and a second ball entry unit provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
The first state in which the gaming ball can not enter or is difficult to enter the first ball entry portion, and the second state in which the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry portion or is easier to enter than the first state And a movable body that can be switched to
Switching control means for executing switching control of changing the movable body from the first state to the second state and then to the first state based on a predetermined trigger;
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player based on the entry of game balls into the respective ball entry portions of the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion;
Equipped with
There is provided a ball receiving portion capable of receiving gaming balls flowing down the gaming area in a situation where the movable body is at least in the first state,
When the movable body switches from the first state to the second state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to be capable of entering the second ball entry portion. I assume.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the level of attention to games.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is the elements on larger scale of FIG. 4 which expands and shows a variable winning prize apparatus and its periphery structure. (A) is a front view of a variable winning device and its peripheral configuration, (b) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device. It is a perspective view of a variable winning a prize device and its peripheral composition. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows game times control processing. It is a flow chart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening and closing processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a flow of a game in a normal gaming state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game in the opening and closing execution mode. It is a front view which shows a variable winning prize apparatus and its periphery structure in modification 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view of the shutter in a variable winning prize apparatus. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device according to the second embodiment and its peripheral structure, (b) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device. (A) is a perspective view of a variable winning prize apparatus and its peripheral configuration, (b) is a plan view showing a rear surface portion of the open / close door. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game in the normal gaming state, (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. (A) is a front view of the variable winning prize device and its peripheral configuration in the third embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view thereof. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device, (b) is a plan view of an opening and closing member and its peripheral configuration. It is a perspective view of a variable winning a prize device and its peripheral composition. It is an explanatory view for explaining a modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a distribution table. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows notice production control processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining notice production. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the opening and closing execution mode. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning prize apparatus in an open state in the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning prize apparatus in the closing state in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the open state A, and (b) is a plan view thereof. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in an open state B. FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence of a jackpot type and the open state of a variable winning a prize apparatus. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening-and-closing pattern of the variable winning prize apparatus in one round game in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment, (b) and (c) explain the other example FIG. FIG. 35 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between each round and the open / close pattern of the variable winning device in the second modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a perspective view of an opening-and-closing member in modification 3 of a 4th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an operation mode of an opening and closing member. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of each round in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment; (b) is the open state A in the jackpot type and the open / close execution mode It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the frequency | count of switching of. It is an explanatory view for explaining another example of modification 4 of a 4th embodiment. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of the 15th round in the modification 5 of the fourth embodiment, (b) is an explanatory view for explaining another example It is. (A) is a front view of a variable winning unit and its peripheral configuration in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning unit. It is a sectional view of a variable winning combination unit. It is a perspective view of the opening-and-closing member in a 6th embodiment. It is a side view of an opening and closing member. It is an explanatory view for explaining an operation mode of the opening and closing member in the opening and closing execution mode. (A) is a front view of the variable winning prize device and its surrounding structure in the first modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device corresponding to the cross section along line AA of FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device corresponding to the cross section along line AA of FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a front view of a prize-winning unit and its surrounding structure in a 7th embodiment, (b) is a BB line sectional view of (a). It is an explanatory view for explaining a distribution table. It is a figure which shows another example of a game machine. It is a figure which shows another example of a flow-path formation part. It is a figure which shows another example of a flow-path formation part. It is a figure which shows another example of a game machine.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is abbreviate | omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. The gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated backward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip and has a function to lock the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. The front door frame 14 has a function to lock the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  In the front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13, a window portion 61 is formed so that almost the entire game area described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 to which sound effects and the like according to the game situation are output are provided.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are vertically juxtaposed. An upper plate 71 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 similarly opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper tray 71 has a function for temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing gaming balls that have become surplus in the upper tray 71.

  A firing handle 60 is provided to the right of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the firing handle 60, the gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball firing mechanism 53 provided below the gaming area PE in the inner frame 13 toward the gaming area PE. In this case, by changing the amount of rotational operation of the launch handle 60, the launch intensity of the gaming balls launched toward the game area PE, that is, the momentum of the launch, is changed.

  The game area PE is formed on the game board 24 mounted in the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

  The game board 24 has a plate shape, and an inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the surface (front surface) thereof. A game area PE is formed so as to be divided by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52. Further, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 constitute an induction rail 54 for gaming balls to the game area PE, and the game is shot from the gaming ball shooting mechanism 53 by the player rotating the shooting handle 60. The ball is guided to the upper part of the play area PE by the guide rail 54.

  The guide rail 54 is formed such that its outlet portion faces the upper center of the play area PE on one side of the play area PE. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the launch handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the gaming ball at the top of the game area PE is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the induction rail 54 is formed to the opposite side Shift to the side. The exit portion of the guide rail 54 is provided on the left side of the game area PE.

  In the range divided as the game area PE in the game board 24, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by router processing are formed. Each opening has a general winning opening 31 (see FIG. 5), an upper operating opening (first start entering ball) 33, a lower operating opening (second starting incoming ball) 34, a variable winning device 201, a through gate 35, A variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, a character display unit 44 and the like are provided.

  When entry to the general winning opening 31, upper operating opening 33, lower operating opening 34, through gate 35 and variable winning device 201 occurs, detection sensors (general winning opening winning sensors 31e, corresponding to each other) It is detected by the upper operation opening winning sensor 33b, the lower operation opening winning sensor 34c, the through winning sensor 35a, and the special winning opening prize sensor 202a). Then, when entering the general winning opening 31, the upper operating opening 33, the lower operating opening 34, and the variable winning device 201 is detected, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. In this case, the payout of three winning balls is performed when entry to the upper actuation opening 33 is detected, and when the entry to the lower actuation opening 34 is detected, the delivery of two winning balls is performed. When the payout is executed and the entry into the general winning opening 31 is detected, the payout of 10 prize balls is executed, and when the entry into the variable winning device 201 is detected, the 15 awards are displayed. The ball is paid out.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary, for example, the number of prize balls for the lower actuation port 34 may be larger than the number of prize balls for the upper actuation port 33, or the prize balls for both actuation ports 33 and 34. The number may be the same. Further, the number of winning balls relating to the variable winning device 201 may be smaller than the number of winning balls relating to the operation openings 33, 34, or may be the same as the number of winning balls of both operation openings 33, 34. However, in order to maintain the superiority of winning to the variable winning device 201, it is preferable that the number of winning balls relating to the variable winning device 201 be larger than the number of winning balls relating to the operation openings 33, 34. In addition, the number of winning balls associated with the general winning opening 31 may be equal to or greater than the number of winning balls associated with the variable winning device 201. As will be described later, while the general winning opening 31 is a ball entering section having nothing to do with a game for making a big hit lottery that forms the core of the game or a game with a big hit, a prize based on entering the general winning hole 31 It can be said that the ball plays an auxiliary role in playing this core game. In that respect, as the number of winning balls relating to the general winning opening 31 increases (or as the entry to the general winning opening 31 is more likely to occur), the number of balls decreases to play a game etc. It is possible to reduce the number of balls or to increase the number of prize balls obtained in total.

  In addition, the game board 24 is provided with an out port, and game balls that did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port. In addition, the game board 24 has a large number of game nails 38 implanted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed. .

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being ejected from the gaming area PE after passing through the opening, but also the gaming area PE after passing through the opening The aspect which continues the flow-down of the said game area PE, without being discharged | emitted from is also included. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of the game ball to the out port, the game to the general winning port 31, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, the through gate 35 or the variable winning device 201 The ball entry is also expressed as a winning. Of the general winning opening 31, the upper operating opening 33, the lower operating opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 201, the through gate 35 is configured to return the winning game ball PE again. On the other hand, the other winning portions 31, 33, 34, 201 guide the winning game balls to the back side of the game board 24 and do not return them to the game area PE (do not enter the other winning portions or out again). It is configured.

  A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game balls can flow down is divided into a plurality.

  Specifically, an upper area PE1 which is an area above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PE, and a lower area than the upper area PE1 which is continuous with the variable display unit 36 A left region PE2 which is a left region, and a right region PE3 which is a region which is continuous below the upper region PE1 and which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36, and left and right regions PE2 and PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PE4 which is a lower area than the variable display unit 36, which is continuous with the lower side.

  Which one of the areas PE1 to PE4 the game area falls (passes) is determined by the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 60, that is, the propelling power of the game ball. Specifically, the player is fired when the player performs a turning operation of the firing handle 60 with a turning operation amount of a first range which is equal to or greater than a predetermined turning amount and less than a reference turning amount as a first firing operation. The gaming ball is more likely to be hit to the left in the upper side area PE1 than the lateral center position. In this case, the gaming ball flows down the gaming area PE in the order of the upper area PE1 → the left area PE2 → the lower area PE4.

  On the other hand, when the player performs the turning operation of the firing handle 60 with the turning operation amount of the second range which is equal to or more than the reference turning amount as the second firing operation, the fired gaming ball is in the lateral direction in the upper area PE1. It is more likely to be hit to the right than the center position of. In this case, the gaming balls flow downward in the order of the upper area PE1 → the right area PE3 → the lower area PE4. That is, by adjusting the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 60, whether the game ball will play on the left route flowing down the left area PE2, or whether the game ball will play on the right route flowing down the right area PE3 , It is possible for the player to select.

  The reference pivoting amount is a pivoting operation amount in which the rate at which the gaming ball flows down to the left side area PE2 and the rate at which the gaming ball flows down to the right side area PE3 is the same or substantially the same. Is a pivoting operation amount that allows the launched game ball to pass through the induction rail 54 and enter the game area PE. In the first range of pivoting operation amount, the rate at which the gaming ball flows down in the left side area PE2 is high, and in the second range of pivoting manipulation amount, the rate in which the gaming ball flows down the right side area PE3 is high.

  The upper operating opening 33 and the lower operating opening 34 are unitized as an operating opening device and installed on the game board 24. The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned, in more detail, vertically, with the upper operation port 33 facing upward. The game ball can reach the upper operating opening 33 and the lower operating opening 34 regardless of whether the player is performing the first or second firing operation. The lower operating port 34 is provided with a motorized part 34 a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The motorized accessory 34a is in an open state (a support state or a guide state) which allows entry of the ball into the lower operation port 34, and a closed state where entry of the ball into the lower operation port 34 is more difficult or impossible than the open state. It is configured to be switchable between (a non-supporting state or a non-guiding state). Here, a supplementary description of the motor-operated role 34 a will be given.

  The operation opening case 33a which constitutes the upper operation opening 33 protrudes to the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length <the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operation opening case 33a (that is, the right and left width of the upper operation opening 33) is a length slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the lower side length is in the case where the motorized accessory 34a is in a closed state. The length is greater than the distance between the left and right motorized roles 34a. In addition, when the motorized accessory 34a is in the closed state, the interval between the operating ports 33 and 34 so that the distance between the operating opening case 33a and the upper end of the motorized accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball. Has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming ball can not win in the lower operation opening 34 in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, and winning in the lower operation opening 34 becomes possible by opening the electric bonus 34a. At this time, especially during the movement of the motorized part 34a from the closed state to the open state, as described above, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape, which causes an obstacle. It is impossible to win the game ball in the lower operation opening 34 until the bonus item 34a is sufficiently released, and it is possible to win only when the electric bonus item 34a is almost fully open. That is, the game ball dropped from above hits the side surface of the operation opening case 33a and is flipped outward, and does not directly win the lower operation opening 34. As a result, when the motorized product 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower operating port 34, and only when the opened state of the motorized product 34a is continued, the lower operating port 34 is opened. Winning is easy.

  In addition to the configuration in which the operation port case 33a of the upper operation port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the operation port case 33a of the upper operation port 33 has a two-stage configuration with a narrow upper portion and a wide lower portion, An obstacle nail may be implanted diagonally below the case 33a.

  The variable winning device 201 is installed in the lower area PE4 of the gaming board 24, and more specifically, installed in the center in the left-right direction in the lowermost part of the gaming area PE. The variable winning device 201 is provided with a large winning opening 202 (see FIG. 7B) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 203 for opening and closing the high winning opening 202. The opening / closing door 203 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win or is difficult to win, and the game ball is easy to win when it is won in the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state.

  Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which transition is made when the jackpot is won or the special win is won. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening aspect of the variable winning device 201, the variable winning device 201 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit, with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) winnings There is an aspect to be done.

  The flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are installed on the left and right sides of the lower area PE4 so as to sandwich the variable winning device 201. The left channel forming portion 131 forms a gaming ball channel through which gaming balls having passed through the left area PE2 can flow down, and with the right channel forming portion 161, gaming balls having passed through the right area PE3 are flowing down It is to form a possible game ball flow path. These flow path forming units 131 and 161 are configured to lead gaming balls which have flowed down each area of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3 to the variable winning device 201 respectively, and are formed of colorless and transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin There is.

  The flow path forming portions 131 and 161 both project forward from the front of the game board 24 to the front of the gaming machine, and the front faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14. The distance between the front face of each flow path forming portion 131, 161 and the window panel 62 is narrower than that of one game ball, and the game ball can not pass in front of the flow path forming portions 131, 161 It has become. Therefore, a part of the outer edge of the game area PE (specifically, the outer edge of the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the game area PE) is divided and formed by the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. In addition, predetermined shaping | molding and coloring are made and the decoration is given to the front part of each flow-path formation part 131,161.

  The right side flow passage forming unit 161 is provided with a main display unit 43 and a symbol display unit 44. The main display unit 43 and the symbol display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the right flow passage forming unit 161. That is, the main display unit 43 and the display unit 44 for prizes are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is in front of both display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display 43, a round display RS for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is entered as a result of the internal lottery (or in the open / close execution mode); In order to clearly indicate the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operation opening 34, and the first result display unit AS for clarifying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the operation opening 33 And the second result display unit BS.

  In the round display unit RS, the display of the number of rounds is started when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the display is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  In the first result display unit AS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper actuation opening 33, and as a result of the stop of the fluctuation display, the internal lottery performed on the basis of the winning of the upper actuation opening 33 The results are specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operation port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit AS and the fluctuation display After switching to the open / close execution mode.

  In the second result display unit BS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the lower operation opening 34, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operation opening 34 The results are specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the lower operation port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit BS displays the predetermined stop result and displays the variation After switching to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, based on the winning on any of the operation openings 33, 34, the variable display is started on the corresponding result display units AS, BS, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game play. However, one game round is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, for example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if winning is generated in any operation opening 33, 34, the single In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the game is repeated until the variable display is stopped in a state in which the predetermined stop result is displayed. And once.

  The prize display 44 is a display for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning on the through gate 35. In this case, the prize display unit 44 uses the winning on the through gate 35 as a trigger to perform variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning on the through gate 35 The result of is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning on the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the electronic part opening state, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the role display 44 and the fluctuation display After being stopped, shift to the open state. In the open state, the motorized accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Although the main display unit 43 and the character display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used. It is also good.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) symbols that are a kind of symbols. Further, a center frame 42 is disposed on the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and does not cause a problem that the visibility of the display screen is reduced by the drop of the game ball. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower positions, and these symbols are displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variable display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning on the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with that. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance to the game times to shift to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the opening of the big winning opening 202 of the variable winning device 201 is performed 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. The symbol of the predetermined combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a first suspension light emitting unit 45 corresponding to the first result display unit AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided. The number of game balls winning in the upper operation opening 33 is held to a maximum of four, and the number of the held balls is displayed by the lighting of the first held light emitting section 45. In the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a second hold light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the second result display unit BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided. The number of game balls winning in the lower operation opening 34 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of the held balls is displayed by the lighting of the second light emission section 46. As described above, since the upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first reserved light emitting unit 45 and the second reserved light emitting unit 46 is not impeded by the falling of the game balls. ing.

  At the lower part of the center frame 42, a third reserved light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the character display unit 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 35 is suspended up to four times, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by lighting of the third reserved light emitting unit 47. The reserved light emitting units 45 to 47 may be configured to be displayed on a part of the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 comprises a main control board having a function (main control circuit) which controls main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) which monitors the power supply, and the main control board is a transparent resin material. And the like are accommodated in a substrate box 83 formed of, for example. The substrate box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) covering the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected to each other by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or bonding means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. And by being connected inseparably by these box joint parts 85, when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened, the substrate box 83 needs to be broken or partially cut off. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform coupling processing.

  The box connecting portion 85 may have any configuration as long as it can unopenably connect the box base and the box cover, but by inserting the locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box connecting portion 85 The box cover and the box cover are non-openably coupled. The combining process by the box combining unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the combining, and enables such an event to be promptly and easily detected even if unauthorized opening is performed, Even after the release, it is possible to perform the release process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling parts 85. When the substrate box 83 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the main control substrate accommodated or when the main control substrate is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portions 85 Disconnect the connected part of the box and the connected part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the substrate box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the main control substrate inside can be taken out. Thereafter, in the case of rejoining processing, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other box coupling parts 85. If a history indicating that the substrate box 83 has been opened is left in the substrate box 83, it is possible to easily find that unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. The coupling pieces 86 correspond one-to-one with the plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the substrate box 83 and the mounting block are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. The combining process is performed between

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the said board | substrate box 83, it is good also as a structure which affixes sealing seal so that the boundary of a box base and a box cover may be straddled. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the pasting point, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag for transmitting a response wave including identification information to a ringing wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is disconnected and the response is The configuration may be such that transmission of waves is not possible.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the effect control board is a substrate box made of transparent resin material or the like. It is configured to be housed in 84.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a dispensing mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a protective cover portion 94 which protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

  The payout mechanism section 92 is disposed to bypass the protective cover section 94, and the tank 95 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game arcade are successively replenished, and the game stored in the tank 95 And a dispensing device 96 for dispensing balls. The gaming balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the dispensing mechanism section 92 is provided with a back pack substrate on which a main power of, for example, 24 AC is supplied and a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotating shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when a game ball runs out in the tank 95, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of award balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of gaming balls. Output terminals for signal output each time lending out, output terminals for signal output when the gaming machine main unit 12 is opened, output terminals for signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened, and state transition such as open / close execution mode An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. In addition, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of gaming balls are lent is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The controller collection unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power supply and emission control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power source and discharge control device 98 are disposed so as to be stacked back and forth so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control substrate for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in the substrate box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power supply and emission control device 98 is configured by housing the power supply and emission control substrate in a substrate box, and the substrate generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices etc. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 60 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, and can maintain the state at the time of the power failure even when the power failure occurs, and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure. It is supposed to be.

<Channel forming unit 131, 161 and variable winning device 201>
In the present embodiment, the flow path forming units 131 and 161, the variable winning device 201, and the configuration related thereto are characteristic. Therefore, the flow channel forming units 131 and 161, the variable winning device 201, and the configuration related thereto will be supplementarily described below with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a partial enlarged view of FIG. 4 showing the variable winning device 201 and its peripheral configuration in an enlarged manner, FIG. 6 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device 201, and (b) and (c) are variable winning devices FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of 201, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 201 and its peripheral configuration.

  First, the left flow passage forming portion 131 will be described with reference to FIG. The left flow passage forming portion 131 is disposed along the inner rail portion 51 at the left portion of the lower region PE4. As described above, the left flow passage forming portion 131 protrudes forward from the front surface of the gaming board 24 and is configured such that the gaming ball can not flow forward of the left flow passage forming portion 131. The upper surface portion 132 of the left flow passage forming portion 131 is a rolling surface on which gaming balls can roll, and forms a flow passage for guiding the gaming balls to the left and right center sides of the lower region PE4.

  The upper surface portion 132 is formed to have a step in the vertical direction, and is divided into a first inclined portion 133 on the upstream side and a second inclined portion 136 on the downstream side. The first inclined portion 133 is inclined downward to the right in a front view, and forms a first left flow passage for guiding the gaming ball having flowed down the left region PE2 toward the left gaming nail group 134. The left gaming nail group 134 is composed of a plurality of gaming nails 38 arranged in a substantially linear fashion between the first inclined portion 133 and the lower operation opening 34 disposed above the variable winning device 201. The guide path which can guide the game ball from the first inclined portion 133 to the lower operation opening 34 is formed.

  A gap 135 through which one game ball can pass is formed between the first inclined portion 133 and the left side game nail group 134 and at an intermediate position of the left side game nail group 134. The game ball can be dropped. Below the gap 135, general winning openings 31a and 31b opening upward are arranged, and one game ball can be won in each of the general winning openings 31a and 31b. A plurality of game nails 38 are arranged between the gap 135 and the general winning opening 31a, 31b, and the game balls dropped from the gap 135 are randomly distributed by the game nails 38. Therefore, there are cases where the game balls dropped from the gap 135 win in the general winning openings 31a and 31b, and sometimes they do not win. In the present embodiment, two general winning openings 31 are arranged, but the number of general winning openings 31 is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. .

  The second inclined portion 136 is inclined downward to the right in a front view, and the most downstream end (terminal end) thereof is opened toward the variable winning device 201. The second inclined portion 136 is disposed below the general winning openings 31a and 31b, and the left second flow path for guiding the game balls not winning in the general winning openings 31a and 31b to the variable winning device 201. It is formed.

  Between the second inclined portion 136 and the first inclined portion 133, a first vertical wall portion 137 is formed, which forms the step and connects the inclined portions 133 and 136. The first vertical wall portion 137 extends in the vertical direction, and between the first vertical wall portion 137 and the general winning opening 31a, a left third flow path through which one game ball can pass is formed. . Therefore, when the gaming ball dropped from the gap 135 passes through the left side of the general winning opening 31a, the gaming ball can reach the second inclined portion 136 through the third flow path.

  In the present embodiment, the second inclined portion 136 is continuous with the lower end portion of the first vertical wall portion 137, and the most downstream portion (an end portion on the side of the variable winning device 201) from the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 137. There is a configuration in which there is no escape passage of the game ball such as an out-port between them. Therefore, all of the gaming balls having passed through the third flow path on the left and the gaming balls dropped onto the second inclined portion 136 are led out to the variable winning device 201 side. In addition, the rolling surface of the gaming ball in the first inclined portion 133 and the second inclined portion 136 is flat without unevenness, and smooth rolling (flowing down) of the gaming ball is possible.

  Further, a plurality of game nails 38 are arranged in a region PE4a between the lower operation opening 34 and the variable winning device 201 and a region PE4b between the left game nail group 134 and the variable winning device 201. The game nail 38 is laid out so as to guide the game balls having flowed into the areas PE 4 a and PE 4 b to the variable winning device 201. For this reason, the game balls which flow out of the side of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 and the game balls which fell from the gap 135 and flowed into the area PE 4b flow down to the variable winning device 201 side. If the game balls in the areas PE4a and PE4b flow downward toward the variable winning device 201, the game nails 38 in these areas may be omitted, or the game nails 38 may be replaced with synthetic resin passage members (guidance A member may be provided.

  At the most downstream portion of the second inclined portion 136, a second vertical wall portion 138 extending downward (inner rail portion 51) is provided. At the upper part of the second vertical wall portion 138, an out port 141 where game balls can enter is provided, and the game balls entered into the out port 141 are guided to the back side of the game board 24, and the game area It is discharged from PE. The out port 141 opens in the lateral direction (right side) of the gaming machine, and its size is such that one gaming ball can pass through.

  At the front of the left channel forming portion 131 in the out port 141 and its periphery, that is, in the front portion of the left channel forming portion 131, the game board having entered at least the out port 141 and the out port 141 In a portion overlapping from the front of the gaming machine with respect to the guiding passage leading to the back side, predetermined decoration is provided by plating, a seal or the like, and coloring is performed. On the other hand, the second inclined portion 136, which is the rolling surface of the game ball, does not have such coloration, and the portion has a light transmittance lower than that of the second inclined portion 136. As a result, the flow of the gaming balls having entered the opening of the out port 141 and the out port 141 in front view from the front of the gaming machine is not visible or difficult to see. That is, the out port 141 has a lower visibility than other ball entry units (for example, the variable winning device 201), and is configured to be less noticeable.

  At that time, a display indicating or indicating the out-port 141 on the front of the left channel forming portion 131 in the out-port 141 and its periphery so that the player, hall employee, etc. can grasp the existence of the out-port 141 For example, "OUT" may be provided. The visibility of the out port 141 may be reduced by forming the portion with an opaque material or a material having a light transmittance lower than that of the second inclined portion 136 instead of coloring the portion. Good.

  Incidentally, the left flow passage forming portion 131 itself is formed of a transparent synthetic resin as described above, and has a light transmitting property. Therefore, by arranging a light emitting substrate mounted with a plurality of light emitting elements capable of emitting light toward the front of the gaming machine or to the side of the gaming machine (up and down, left and right), behind the left channel forming portion 131 For example, it is possible to perform light emission effects such as brightly illuminating the second inclined portion 136.

  Next, the right side flow passage forming portion 161 will be described. The upper surface portion 162 of the right side flow passage forming portion 161 is a rolling surface on which the game balls can roll, and forms a flow passage for guiding the game balls to the left and right center sides of the lower region PE4. The upper surface portion 162 of the right side flow passage forming portion 161 is symmetrical with the upper surface portion 132 of the left side flow passage forming portion 131, and has the first inclined portion 163, the second inclined portion 166 and the first vertical wall portion 167. doing.

  The first inclined portion 163 is inclined downward to the left in a front view, and forms a first right flow path for guiding the gaming ball having flowed down the right side area PE3 toward the right side play nail group 164. The right side game nail group 164 forms a guide path which can guide the game ball to the lower operation opening 34, and between the first inclined portion 163 and the right side game nail group 164, and the middle position of the right side game nail group 164 There is formed a gap 165 through which one game ball can pass. In the lower part of the gap 165, general winning openings 31c and 31d opened upward are arranged, and a game ball dropped from the gap 165 can win the general winning openings 31c and 31d.

  The second inclined portion 166 is inclined downward to the left in a front view, and forms a second right flow path for guiding the gaming ball toward the variable winning device 201. The second inclined portion 166 is disposed below the general winning openings 31c and 31d, and derives to the variable winning device 201 game balls that have not won in the general winning openings 31c and 31d. The first vertical wall portion 167 connects the first inclined portion 163 and the second inclined portion 166, and forms a third right flow passage through which one game ball can pass between the first vertical wall portion 167 and the general winning opening 31d. doing.

  In the present embodiment, the second inclined portion 166 is continuous with the lower end portion of the first vertical wall portion 167 and extends from the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 167 to the end portion (the end portion on the variable winning device 201 side) There are no escape routes for game balls such as out ports between the Therefore, all of the gaming balls having passed through the third right channel and the gaming balls dropped onto the second inclined portion 166 are led out to the variable winning device 201 side. In addition, the rolling surface of the gaming ball in the first inclined portion 163 and the second inclined portion 166 is flat without unevenness, and smooth rolling (flowing down) of the gaming ball is possible.

  In the area PE4c between the right-hand game nail group 164 and the variable winning apparatus 201, a plurality of game nails 38 for guiding the game balls flowing into the area PE4c to the variable winning apparatus 201 are provided. The game balls having flowed into the PE 4 c all flow toward the variable winning device 201. If the game ball in the area PE4c flows down toward the variable winning device 201, the game nail 38 in the area PE4c may be omitted, or the game nail 38 may be replaced with a synthetic resin passage member (guide member). It may be provided.

  At the most downstream portion of the second inclined portion 166, a second vertical wall portion 168 extending downward (inner rail portion 51) is provided. At an upper portion of the second vertical wall portion 168, an out port 171 for discharging game balls from the game area PE is provided. The out port 171 opens in the lateral direction (left side) of the gaming machine, and its size is such that one gaming ball can pass through. The height position of the out-port 171 is the same as the out-port 141 of the left channel forming portion 131, and the out-ports 141, 171 face each other with the variable winning device 201 interposed therebetween. Further, as in the case of the out-port 141, the out-port 171 is made opaque by making the front face of the right channel forming portion 161 in the out-port 171 and its peripheral part opaque, so that the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is different. It is lower than the ball. By the way, in the present embodiment, no out ports other than the out ports 141 and 171 are provided.

  Next, the variable winning device 201 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6A, at the lowermost position on the game board 24, an opening 207 is provided which penetrates the game board 24 in the thickness direction. The variable winning device 201 includes a plate-like base body 211, and is attached to the game board 24 by fitting the base body 211 into the opening 207.

  The distance between the front surface portion 211a of the base body 211 and the window panel 62 is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and a passage portion 208 through which the gaming ball can pass is formed in front of the front surface portion 211a. There is. The passage portion 208 includes a side wall portion 213 formed of the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 and a bottom portion 214 formed of the inner rail portion 51. A big winning opening 202 is formed at the top (see FIG. 7B). The big winning opening 202 opens upward, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a plan view. The size (width dimension) of the special winning opening 202 is such that a plurality of gaming balls can pass simultaneously.

  A through hole 222 penetrating the base body 211 in the thickness direction is formed at the lower center of the passage portion 208. The through hole 222 is formed in a substantially elliptical shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and has a size that allows a plurality of gaming balls to pass simultaneously. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), a ball passage 221 is provided on the back side of the base body 211, and the ball passage 221 communicates with the passage portion 208 through the through hole 222. The ball passage 221 extends rearward, and the gaming ball having reached the ball passage 221 is guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 221a. At the middle position, a winning prize winning sensor 202 a for detecting a gaming ball that has won the big winning prize opening 202 is disposed. The special winning opening winning sensor 202a is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and when the game ball passes through the detection area of the special winning opening winning sensor 202a, the main detection signal (detection signal) is main control It is input to the device 81. The main control device 81 determines the presence or absence of a winning on the special winning opening 202 based on the detection information.

  A plate-like shutter 216 as an open / close door 203 is disposed to cover the special winning opening 202. The shutter 216 is configured to be able to slide in the front-rear direction, and retracts from the front surface 211a of the base body 211 (the front surface of the game board 24) to the front of the gaming machine. , And can be displaced to the retracted position where the protrusion to the front of the gaming machine is suppressed.

  When the shutter 216 is located at the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 7B, a reception area RA where the game ball can be received by the big winning opening 202 is formed in the upper part of the passage portion 208. Receiving area RA has the same position and the same shape and size as large winning opening 202 in plan view, and the formation of receiving area RA allows the winning of gaming balls to large winning opening 202. Ru. In the retracted position, the front end portion of the shutter 216 is positioned flush with the front surface portion 211a of the base body 211 or on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the front surface portion 211a. Thus, the game ball can pass through the front of the shutter 216 at the retracted position, and the game ball is prevented from being caught on the boundary between the base body 211 and the shutter 216, and a smooth flow of the game ball is ensured. It is done.

  On the other hand, when the shutter 216 is located at the projecting position, as shown in FIG. 7A, the special winning opening 202 is covered by the shutter 216 from the upper side, so that the reception area RA disappears. As a result, the variable winning device 201 is closed, and the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 202 is restricted. In the closed state, it is not necessary to have a configuration in which the gaming ball can not be won in the big winning opening 202, and may be able to win in a range where it is difficult to win as compared to the open state. The point is that the degree of closing and opening is arbitrary as long as the ease of winning on the big winning opening 202 differs between the open state and the closed state.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 6A, the height position of the left and right end portions 216a and 216b of the shutter 216 is at least the gaming ball 1 from the second inclined portions 136 and 166 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. It is set to a position lowered downward by the size of the piece. In other words, the step portions 204 are formed on the left and right sides of the shutter 216 so that the left and right end portions 216a and 216b of the shutter 216 are lower than the second inclined portions 136 and 166 by the diameter of the gaming ball. . The out-ports 141 and 171 are disposed in the step portion 204 in such a manner that the out-ports 141 and 171 are opened to the shutter 216 side. Therefore, when the gaming ball rolls on the shutter 216 located at the projecting position, the gaming ball is guided by the shutter 216 to the out ports 141 and 171.

  The shutter 216 is provided with a guide function for guiding the game ball to the out ports 141 and 171. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, on the left side of the upper surface portion of the shutter 216, a first shutter inclined portion 217 which is inclined downward toward the out port 141 is provided. The second shutter inclined portion 218 is inclined downward toward the out port 171. The respective inclined portions 217 and 218 are symmetrical in the left-right direction, and the gaming balls having reached the upper surface portion of the shutter 216 are guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by the respective inclined portions 217 and 218. Note that it is not necessary to incline the entire shutter 216, and it is sufficient if at least the upper surface portion thereof is inclined.

  The shutter 216 extends in the left-right direction, and in detail, the left and right end portions 216 a and 216 b are located in the vicinity of the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. The distance between the left and right end portions 216a and 216b of the shutter 216 and the out-ports 141 and 171 is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the game is performed from between the shutter 216 located at the projecting position and each out-port 141 and 171 The ball is supposed not to fall. For this reason, the gaming balls guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by the shutter 216 all enter the out ports 141 and 171 unless the shutter 216 is displaced to the retracted position in the middle of the guidance.

  In addition, when the shutter 216 is located at the retracted position, the game ball is inserted in the out port 141, 171 in principle unless an event such as the flow-down direction of the game ball changes due to contact between the game balls. I don't do spheres.

  As shown in FIGS. 6B and 6C, on the back side of the base body 211, a variable winning drive unit 219 for driving the shutter 216 is attached. The variable winning drive unit 219 includes a solenoid as a drive source, and a link mechanism as a driving force transmission unit that transmits the driving force from the solenoid to the shutter 216. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81. When the solenoid is driven, the shutter 216 retracts from the projecting position to the retracted position, and the variable winning device 201 switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main controller 81 is stopped, the shutter 216 advances from the retracted position to the projecting position by the biasing force of the biasing means (spring or the like), and the variable winning device 201 switches from the open state to the closed state.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 is a ROM 113 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 112 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The power failure monitoring board 115 and the payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, a power supply having a function of supplying operating power and the emission control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 through the power failure monitoring board 115.

  Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. Various sensors include a general winning opening 31, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a general winning opening winning sensor 31e for detecting winning on the variable winning device 201, an upper operating opening winning sensor 33b, A lower winning opening winning sensor 34c, a through winning sensor 35a, a special winning opening winning sensor 202a, and the like are provided. In the MPU 112, based on the detection results of the various sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 35a, 202a, the winning determination (entering determination) or the like to each ball entry portion is performed. Further, the MPU 112 executes a big hit occurrence lottery based on the winning on the upper operation port 33 and the lower actuation port 34, and executes a support generation lottery based on the winning on the through gate 35.

  The power failure monitoring board 115, the payout control device 97, the effect control device 82 and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. A payout ball command is output to the payout control device 97, for example, based on the result of the winning determination on the winning ball corresponding entry portion corresponding to the payout of the winning balls.

  Various effects commands for presentation are output to the effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 112, a motorized product drive unit 34b and a variable winning drive unit 219 are connected as various drive units. The main control substrate 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, drive control of the variable prize drive unit 219 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the special winning opening 202 is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the motorized prize 34a is won, the MPU 112 executes drive control of the motorized prize drive unit 34b so that the motorized prize 34a is opened and closed. In each gaming session, the display control of the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112, and the main display unit in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 201 Display control of the round display unit RS at 43 is executed. Then, when the lottery result as to whether or not the motorized combination 34a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the combination display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

  Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112, and through the external output terminal 99, ball entry information and jackpots to various ball entry sections with respect to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side. Etc. information about the lottery result is output. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like by the hall computer HC.

  The power failure monitoring board 115 relays the main control board 111 and the power supply and emission control device 98, and monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply and emission control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the winning ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, etc. generate necessary operation power for each and supply the generated operation power. Incidentally, the power supply and discharge control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply section for power interruption is mainly used. The RAM 114 of the control device 81 is supplied with storage power.

  Further, the power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 has a firing rail extending toward the induction rail 54 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device for feeding the game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the firing rail, and And a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that causes the game ball supplied to the shooting rail to be directed toward the guide rail 54, and the game ball is supplied with a drive signal from the power supply and launch control device 98 to the solenoid. Be fired.

  The effect control device 82 is based on the various commands input from the main control device 81, the respective pending light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit provided in the front door frame 14. The drive control unit 64 controls the display control device 212 as well as driving and controlling the control unit 64.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A certain RAM 244 and an interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. The main control unit 81 receives a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command. In addition, it receives game play control commands (game play control information) such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command. Also, it receives an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an open command, a close command, an opening command, and an ending command.

  The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81. The received command is stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242. And the processing which analyzes the stored command is performed, and various effects are performed. Various table storage areas are provided in the ROM 243 of the MPU 242, and various flag storage areas and various counter areas are provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242. When performing various effects, processing using these areas It is possible to do

  The output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided to the respective pending light emitting units 45 to 47 provided to the variable display unit 36 and the front door frame 14. Is connected.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which an MPU 272, a video display processor (VDP) 275, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277 are mounted. There is.

  The MPU 272 is a hold display control command (hold display control information) for performing hold display control from the effect control device 82, a game turn control command (game turn control information) for changing the symbol display, An open / close execution mode command (information for open / close execution mode) for displaying a moving image in the open / close execution mode is received. Then, the received command is analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received command, and control of the VDP 275 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 275) is performed.

  The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 272 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background image.

  The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 272 executes various programs. These work data, flags and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 274.

  The VDP 275 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 275 is formed into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 275 should be referred to as a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 272, the video RAM 277, etc. to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data stored in the video RAM 277 from the character ROM 276 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 276 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 276 holds bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and store image data etc. in each character ROM 276 in a shared manner. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 276 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 273.

  The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 277.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described based on FIG. 9 and FIG. FIG. 9 is a view individually showing the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 10 is a view showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (j), a pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9" respectively, and a shell-shaped picture It is constituted by the sub pattern. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower rows are set. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol . In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the display screen G is such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be

  Further, on the display screen G, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set. Then, the variation display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is finished, the big hit moving picture is displayed as the occurrence of the big hit result.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "specific symbol", and when the probability variation jackpot occurs, a combination of the same specific symbols Is stopped. Also, the main symbol with an even number (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to the "non-specific symbol", and when a big hit usually occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed Ru.

  In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate.

  A first hold display area Ga is set on the left side of the lower part of the display screen G, and a second hold display area Gb is set on the right side of the lower part of the display screen G.

  In the first hold display area (non-priority side hold display area) Ga, unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum hold number when the gaming ball has won the upper actuation opening 33 are juxtaposed in the left-right direction It is displayed to be divided. Specifically, the maximum number of holdings when the gaming ball has won the upper operation opening 33 is four, corresponding to this, in the first holding display area Ga, the first unit holding display area Ga1, the second A unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball is won in the upper operation opening 33 is one, a predetermined image for holding is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is in the upper operation opening 33 In the case where the number of holdings in the case of winning is four, predetermined holding images are displayed in all of the first unit holding display area Ga1 to the fourth unit holding display area Ga4.

  In the second hold display area (priority side hold display area) Gb, unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 of the same number as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the lower operation opening 34 are provided side by side in the horizontal direction The division is displayed as it is. Specifically, the maximum number of holdings when the gaming ball has won in the lower operation opening 34 is four, corresponding to this, in the second holding display area Gb, the first unit holding display area Gb1, the second A unit hold display area Gb2, a third unit hold display area Gb3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball is in the lower operation opening 34 is one, the image for suspension is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball is in the lower operation opening 34 When the number of reservations is four, the images for suspension are displayed in all of the first unit suspension display area Gb1 to the fourth unit suspension display area Gb4.

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lotteries at MPU 112 of Main Controller 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 112 uses a variety of counter information during game play to set a jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 43, setting of effect contents of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the symbol display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery of jackpot occurrence, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 deviates out The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter that determines the fluctuation display time in the main display 43 and the symbol display device 41 We use CS and. Furthermore, the electric combination release counter C4 used in the drawing of whether or not the electric combination 34a of the lower operation opening 34 is in the electric combination release state is used.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and reaches a maximum value and returns to 0. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the change type counter CS is a winning in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34, It is stored in the holding ball storage area 114b as the acquired information storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 114b includes a holding area RE including a first result display area holding area Ra and a second result display area holding area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reserve areas Ra and Rb respectively have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the lottery counter buffer is matched with the winning history to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Each piece of numerical information of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS stored in 114a is stored in any area as hold information. The hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, if winnings to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 occur consecutively in a plurality of times in the first to fourth areas, the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the area. By providing four areas each in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the upper operating opening 33 or the lower operating opening 34 is reserved and stored up to four each. In addition, the storage ball storage area 114b is provided with a total storage number storage area, and the total storage number storage area specifies the number for which the winning history to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is stored. The information to do this is stored.

  The number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, five or more, or may be singular.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started, and the execution area AE at the start of one game cycle On the basis of the various numerical information stored in the, it is determined whether or not it is acceptable.

  Specifically, for each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). When the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hitting random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display area holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the upper operation opening 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the lower operation opening 34 It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a yes / no table (winning information group) in the yes / no table storage area 113a as the yes / no information group storage unit in the ROM 113. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high / low probability success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode (low probability state) and the high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the hit / fall lottery means. In each success or failure table, the value of the random number is set such that the probability of winning in the big hit is higher in the high probability table for the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

  Further, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is out of the results except for the value of the random number for winning the big hit.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are based on the two conditions of (1) lottery mode in the lottery means after completion of opening / closing execution mode, and (2) support mode in electric combination 34a of lower operation opening 34 after completion of opening / closing execution mode. It is set by making a difference.

  As a support mode in the motorized accessory 34a of the lower operating opening 34, when compared in the situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the gaming area PE, the motorized accessory 34a of the lower operating opening 34 Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low And is set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the electronic combination open state winning in the electric combination open symbol selection using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 1/2) However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the motorized role 34a is in the open state when the electronic component is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, one more open The time is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric work open state is elected and the open state of the motorized accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time for setting the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It is done.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 34 will be hit is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the upper operation port 33 is higher than in the lower operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operation port 34 to the lower operation port 34. The probability of winning will increase. Then, when the lower operation opening 34 has a winning, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing his ball much be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time than in the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is also possible to increase the probability of being in the electronic combination open state winning state in. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by making the condition among the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability different from one another or any combination of conditions.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display area holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the upper operation opening 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the lower operation opening 34 It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 113b as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 113.

  In the present embodiment, as the type of jackpot result, usually, a jackpot result and a probability variation jackpot result are set. The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery is the jackpot state winning and the jackpot state is transitioned accordingly.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display area holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the upper operation opening 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the lower operation opening 34 It is stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113, it is determined whether or not the reach should be generated. However, in the game session to shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 112 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Although the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, it may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, in the case where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (pattern), and in the game session in which the variable winning device 201 is in the open / close execution mode In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (pattern) in the symbol display device 41 is started and then the stop display result is derived and displayed The display state to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It is a display state that displays a possible combination of reach symbols and performs variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows in that state.

  More specifically, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41 as a step before the variable display of symbols is ended. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a possible combination of reach symbols, and the variation display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol row under the situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents of FIG. 10 will be specifically described. First, high-speed variable display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed. After that, the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 switches from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can easily or can recognize the symbol being displayed. And while the fluctuation | variation display of upper pattern row Z1 is complete | finished, the fluctuation | variation display aspect of lower figure pattern row Z3 switches from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display. After that, the variation display of the pattern row Z3 shown below ends. In this case, the reach line is formed by the stop display of the main symbol attached with the same number to any one of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, when the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display and the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line Are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is ended.

  Furthermore, in reach display, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, fluctuation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. What performs a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols or reducing a combination of reach symbols is included. In addition, when reach display is performed or before advance display, it is determined whether to display advance notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using reach random number counter C3 or another counter. May be

  For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 112 determines the fluctuation display time of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. Be The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the holding ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display area holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the upper operation opening 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the lower operation opening 34 It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

  For example, the motorized product release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 250, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the gaming ball has won on the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the motorized jack 34a is to be controlled to the open state by the value of the stored motorized jack release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the motorized combination 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the motorized combination 34a is not controlled to be in the open state.

  The MPU 112 determines the fluctuation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE. The variable display time table storage area 113c is used. Further, in the MPU 112, the stop result in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is determined using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the stop result table storage area of the ROM 113 is used for the determination.

<About various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process which are executed to advance a game in the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 112 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the main process activated upon power on and the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). The description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is started up periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 112.

  In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is performed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 35a and 202a are read, the states of the various detection sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 35a and 202a are determined, and processing for storing detection information is executed. . In addition, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the various detection sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 202a corresponding to the generation of the award ball, an award for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the award ball. Set the sphere command. For example, when a winning on the variable winning device 201 is detected by the special winning opening winning sensor 202a, a winning ball command for designating 15 winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls is set. In the subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

  In the subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric character release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4 are respectively incremented by one, and cleared to zero when their counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

  In the subsequent step S104, a winning process for through is accompanied by a winning on the through gate 35. In the through winning process, when the winning on the through gate 35 has occurred, the number of bonus holding memories stored in the electronic book holding area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4") Under the condition, the value of the motorized jack release counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the electric power holding area 114c. In addition, processing for lighting up the third holding light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the number of bonus holding memories with respect to the effect control device 82 is executed.

  Thereafter, after the winning process for the operation opening is executed in step S105, the timer interrupt process is ended. In the winning process for the operating port, based on the game ball having won in any of the operating ports 33, 34, it sets the award ball command to pay out the game ball based on the winning, and the jackpot random number counter An information acquisition process is performed to store the values of C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS.

  In the information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the upper actuation opening 33 (start winning). When winning in the upper operation opening 33, grasp the number of suspension information stored in the suspension area Ra for the first result display unit, and set the grasped number as the first start suspension storage number RaN . On the other hand, when the gaming ball is not winning in the upper actuation opening 33, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball is winning in the lower actuation opening 34 (start winning). When winning in the lower operation port 34, the number of the hold information stored in the second result display area reserve area Rb is grasped, and the grasped number is set as the second start reservation memory number RbN. . Then, it is determined whether or not the set start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start pending storage number N of the corresponding result display section pending area is updated so as to increase by one. Then, when the first start reserve storage number RaN is set, the respective values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS are stored in the first result display portion reserved area Ra. If the second start suspension storage number RbN is set, the large start random number counter C1, the large hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS are stored. Each value is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second result display holding area Rb. Thereafter, the process for causing the effect control device 82 to light the first suspension light emitting unit 45 or the second suspension light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the start suspension storage number is executed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated in response to the power-on is performed. In the normal process, the main process of the game is performed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S201 to S206 is executed as periodic processing of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S201. In the external signal output process of step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 97. Further, when the effect command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by one, and the counter value is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

  In the following step S203, game number control processing for advancing the game of each game number is executed. In this game number control process, determination of success or failure such as a big hit and distribution determination of a big hit type are performed, and setting of fluctuation display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, setting of fluctuation display in the main display unit 43, etc.

  After the game number control process of step S203 is performed, the process proceeds to step S204, and a game state transition process is performed. By this gaming state transition processing, the gaming state is shifted to the open / close execution mode or the like. The details of the game number control process of step S203 and the game state transition process of step S204 will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S205, a process for supporting a combination for driving and controlling the motorized part 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is performed. In this processing for electronic-support combination, the electronic-arm opening of whether or not the electric-powered commercial article 34a is opened using the numerical information acquired from the electric-powered public-object release counter C4 stored in the electronic-arm holding area 114c of the RAM 114 In addition to performing a lottery, when the electronic combination is in an open state, an opening and closing process of the motorized jack 34a is executed. In addition, display control and the like of the display part 44 for bonus are performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electronic combination open lottery.

  Thereafter, in step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball emission control process, the solenoid of the game ball emission mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the emission permission signal is input from the power supply and emission control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In the following step S207, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set in the RAM 114 or not. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power failure monitoring substrate 115 confirms the occurrence of a power failure and the power failure monitoring substrate 115 inputs a power failure signal to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed is finished, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S208, that is, the current normal It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

  That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114. In step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using such remaining time. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power is shut off, so that the processing at the time of power failure in step S211 and subsequent steps is executed. That is, in step S211, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S212, and after the access to RAM 114 is prohibited in step S213, the power is completely shut off and processing is performed. Continues an infinite loop until it can not execute.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game number control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game number control process, it is first determined in step S301 whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 114 e of the RAM 114. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing described later, and is deleted when ending the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing.

  When in the opening / closing execution mode, the main game is performed without executing the processing of step S302 and subsequent processing, that is, the processing for starting the game play of step S303 to step S305 and the processing of the game play progression for step S306 to step S309. End the control process. That is, when in the open / close execution mode, the game play is not started regardless of whether or not a winning on the operation openings 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If the open / close execution mode is not in effect, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 43 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is in the variable display mode. Note that this determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The variable display in progress flag is stored when the variable display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is erased when the variable display is ended.

  If the main display unit 43 is not in the variable display mode, the process proceeds to the processing for starting the game play of steps S303 to S305. In the processing for starting a game, first, in step S303, it is determined whether or not the common holding number CRN, which is the sum of the start holding storage numbers of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS, is "0". The case where the common holding number CRN is “0” means that the start holding memory numbers RaN and RbN are “0” for both the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. Therefore, the game number control process ends.

  When the common holding number CRN is not “0”, in step S304, data stored in the first result display area reserved area Ra or the second result display area reserved area Rb is set for variable display. After executing the data setting process of (1) and further performing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 in step S305, the game play control process is ended. In the change start process, the winning lottery is executed based on the data (holding information) set in the data setting process, and the game result is terminated so that the game round is ended by the stopping result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery. Make settings. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the game times to be executed this time is set based on the fluctuation type counter CS or the like. In addition, in the variation start process, to the effect control device 82, a variation command including information on a game result and a type command including information on variation display time are performed so that an effect corresponding to a game run to be executed this time is performed. Set the output. The variation command and the type command are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 transmits the received command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the command, the display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 or the like so as to start the effect of the game play.

  When the main display unit 43 is in a variable display mode, the processing for game play progression in steps S306 to S309 is executed. In the processing for game progression, first, at step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 114 has become “0”. The value of the variation display time information is set in the variation start process at the start of the game play. Also, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is activated.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, processing for variable display is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the result display unit is subjected to display control (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit according to the current game run. , This game times control processing ends.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, fluctuation end processing is executed in step S308. In the variation end process, the information set based on the result of the lottery of the variation start process is specified, and the main display unit 43 is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. Do.

  In the following step S309, a change end command is set. Thereafter, the game play control process ends. The change end command set in step S309 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. In the display control device 212, by receiving the change end command, the combination of the final stop symbols in the game is displayed (final stop display).

<Playing state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process of step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in progress. If the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS of one game cycle is finished. When it is not the timing when the variable display ends, the main game state transition processing ends.

  If it is the timing at which the variable display has ended, it is determined in step S403 whether the game result of the current game play corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. If it does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If it corresponds to the switching of the open / close execution mode, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S404. In the start process, it is checked that the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state before the start of the open / close execution mode. Further, in the start processing of the opening / closing execution mode, the setting processing of the opening period for waiting without starting the opening of the variable winning device 201 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the setting process of the opening period, the standby time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114. The value of the timer counter T is decremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle, each time the timer interrupt process is activated).

  In the following step S405, the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 displays the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode ("15" in any of the big hit results in the present embodiment) as round display start processing. To control.

  In the subsequent step S406, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that a display (for example, a moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  Then, after executing the external signal setting process in step S407, the present gaming state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set as the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. You can understand what you did.

  On the other hand, if the open / close execution mode is in effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, this game state transition processing is ended as it is. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the special winning opening / closing process is executed in step S409. Here, the special winning opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether the variable winning device 201 is in the open state and the special winning opening 202 is open. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 219. When the special winning opening 202 is not opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" in step S502, and whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S503. Determine

  When the value of the round counter RC is "0" or when the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the present special winning opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S504, and the variable prize drive unit 219 is set to open the variable prize device 201. Drive state.

  In the following step S505, the process of setting the open time of the round is executed. In the setting process of the opening time, “15000” (30 sec) corresponding to the upper limit opening time (upper limit opening period) of the round is input to the timer counter T.

  In the subsequent step S506, setting processing of the upper limit winning number for each round is performed. In the setting process of the upper limit winning number of each round, a process of inputting "10" corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed.

  Then, in step S507, an open command is set, and the open / close process is ended. The set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each round based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S501 that the variable winning device 201 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S508, and it is determined whether the value of the timer counter T is "0". If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", it is determined in step S509 whether or not the gaming ball has won in the variable winning device 201 based on the detection state of the special winning opening prize sensor 202a. If no winning has occurred, the present opening / closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S510, and then it is determined in step S511 whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or not. If not, the present opening / closing processing ends.

  When the value of the timer counter T is "0" at step S508 and the upper limit opening time has elapsed, or when the value of the winning counter PC is "0" at step S511 and a winning of the upper limit winning number has occurred. , Means that the end condition of the round was established. In such a case, in step S512, the variable prize drive section 219 is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the variable prize apparatus 201.

  In the subsequent step S513, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1 and the process of updating the round counter RC is executed. In step S514, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC is "0".

  If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", setting of the closing time between the round and the round in step S515, that is, the variable winning device 201 changes from the open state to the closed state and then to the open state again. Execute the process In the closing time setting process, a process of inputting "2000" (4 sec) corresponding to the waiting time (interval) between the rounds to the timer counter T is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S516, a closing command is set, and the present opening / closing process is ended. The closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the interval of the round game based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S514 that the value of the round counter RC is "0", in step S517 an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending standby time is set for waiting without starting the next game run for ending in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the timer counter T. In the present embodiment, the waiting time for ending is set to be 5 seconds, and in step S517, processing for inputting "2500" to the timer counter T is performed.

  Thereafter, after the ending command is set in step S518, the present opening / closing processing is ended. The ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15), after executing the special winning opening / closing process in step S409, it is determined in step S410 whether the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the game state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is "0", it is determined by the timer counter T whether or not the waiting time for ending is ended in step S411. If the waiting time for ending has not ended, this game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the waiting time for ending is ended, the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S412.

  In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the setting of the acceptance lottery mode and the support mode after the open / close execution mode is performed. Specifically, when the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the probability variation big hit result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, it shifts to the game state of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and usually becomes a big hit result When the open / close execution mode ends, the game mode shifts to the low probability mode and the limited frequency low frequency support mode gaming state.

  Then, in step S413, processing for ending the display of the round display unit RS is executed, and in step S414, ending processing of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition processing is ended. In the closing process of the open / close execution mode, transition to the open / close execution mode or deletion of various counters and flags used during the open / close execution mode is performed.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal gaming state (the gaming state which is not the open / close execution mode) and the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of gaming in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of gaming in the open / close execution mode.

  First, the flow of the game in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. When the gaming ball having flowed down the left side area PE2 (see FIG. 4) reaches the left flow path forming portion 131, the gaming ball descends along the first inclined portion 133 of the left flow path forming portion 131, and the left side game nail group It is derived toward 134. Then, when the game ball jumps over the gap 135 between the first inclined portion 133 and the left side game nail group 134, the game ball is guided by the left side game nail group 134 toward the lower operation opening 34. When the game ball crosses the left-hand game nail group 134, if the motorized part 34a is in the open state, the game ball is prized in the lower operation opening 34, and the motorized part 34a is in the closed state The game ball falls toward the variable winning device 201 without winning in the lower operation opening 34.

  On the other hand, when the game ball falls from the gap 135 between the first inclined portion 133 and the left side game nail group 134 or the space 135 provided at the middle position of the left side game nail group 134, the game ball wins a general prize. It is led to the upper side of the openings 31a, 31b or the general winning openings 31a, 31b. Then, when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 31a, 31b, the winning is detected by the general winning opening prize sensor 31e, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls are paid out. On the other hand, when the gaming ball dropped from the gap 135 does not win the general winning opening 31a, 31b, the gaming ball is the left side formed between the first vertical wall portion 137 and the general winning opening 31a. By passing through the third flow path or passing between the general winning opening 31 a and the general winning opening 31 b, the liquid drops on the second inclined portion 136 of the left flow path forming portion 131.

  As described above, in the second inclined portion 136, there is a breakout path of the game ball such as an out port between the connection with the first vertical wall portion 137 and the end (the end on the variable winning device 201 side). Since all the game balls dropped onto the second inclined portion 136 are drawn out to the variable winning device 201 side. Then, the gaming ball led to the variable winning device 201 side falls on the upper surface of the shutter 216 located at the projecting position and closing the large winning opening 202, and each inclined portion 217 provided on the shutter 216 , 218 to the out ports 141 and 171. Here, since the distance between the left and right end portions 216a and 216b of the shutter 216 and the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the left flow path forming portion 131 is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, it rolls on the shutter 216 The gaming balls do not fall from between the shutter 216 and the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168, and both enter the out ports 141 and 171.

  Further, in the area PE4b between the left-hand game nail group 134 and the variable winning device 201, the game nails 38 are arranged so as to guide the gaming ball having flowed into the area PE4b to the variable winning device 201. Therefore, even when the gaming ball having passed through the gap 135 does not reach the second inclined portion 136, the gaming ball is led to the variable winning device 201 and falls onto the shutter 216. Then, as in the above case, the user rolls on the shutter 216 and is guided to the out ports 141 and 171.

  When the gaming ball is punched so as to flow down the right side area PE3 (see FIG. 4) and the gaming ball flowing down the right side area PE3 reaches the right side flow path forming portion 161, the gaming ball is the right side flow path forming portion It is derived toward the right side play nail group 164 by the first inclined portion 163 of 161. Also in this case, when the game ball does not reach the right side game nail group 164 or when it falls from the gap 165 provided in the middle position of the right side game nail group 164, the game ball is the general winning opening 31c, 31d or It is led above the general winning openings 31c, 31d.

  And the game ball which did not win the general winning a prize opening 31c and 31d passes the right side 3rd flow path formed between the 1st vertical wall part 167 and the general winning a prize opening 31d, and the general winning a prize opening 31c and By passing through between the general winning opening 31 d or the like, it falls onto the second inclined portion 166 of the right side flow passage forming portion 161. Also in the second inclined portion 166, there is no escape passage of the game ball such as an out port from the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 167 to the end portion (the end portion on the variable winning device 201 side). The game balls dropped onto the inclined portion 166 are all led out to the variable winning device 201 side and dropped onto the upper surface of the shutter 216.

  Further, even when the game ball flows into the area PE4c between the right-hand game nail group 164 and the variable winning apparatus 201, the game nail 38 arranged in the area PE4c is led to the variable winning apparatus 201 side and the upper surface of the shutter 216 Fall up. Furthermore, although it reached to the vicinity of the upper actuation opening 33 and the lower actuation opening 34, the game balls which did not win any of these actuation openings 33, 34 and flowed into the area PE 4a are also led out to the variable winning device 201 side. It falls on the upper surface of the shutter 216.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the game ball passes either the left side area PE2 or the right side area PE3, the game is not won in the upper operation opening 33, the lower operation opening 34 and the general winning opening 31a to 31d. All of the balls are collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 201. When the shutter 216 is in the projecting position and the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state, the collected game balls fall onto the shutter 216 and are then guided by the shutter 216 to the out ports 141 and 171.

  Next, the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. The flow until the gaming balls having flowed down the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3 are collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 201 is the same as in the case of the normal gaming state, and therefore the description is omitted.

  As described above, when transitioning to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 201 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and thereafter switching control (open / close control) from the open state to the closed state is performed at least once (this embodiment) In the form of 15)). In the open state of the variable winning device 201, the shutter 216 is located at the retracted position, so that a receiving area RA (see FIG. 7B) capable of receiving the game ball to the big winning opening 202 is formed. Winning of the game ball is allowed. On the other hand, in the closed state, the reception area RA disappears by positioning the shutter 216 at the projecting position, and the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 202 is restricted.

  Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, in the area where the reception area RA is formed, the gaming balls having flowed down to the second inclined portions 136 and 166 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 and the areas PE4a to PE4c. It is configured to be aggregated into Therefore, when the game balls reach the formation area of the reception area RA in the situation where the shutter 216 is in the retracted position (the situation where the variable winning device 201 is in the open state), all the game balls are in the reception area RA. It flows in and wins the special winning opening 202 (flows into the passage portion 208). As a result, the occurrence of the out ball is suppressed, and it is possible to make the variable winning device 201 win the game balls efficiently.

  On the other hand, when the game ball reaches the formation area of the reception area RA in the situation where the shutter 216 is in the projecting position (the situation where the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state), the game ball is the same as in the normal game state. It falls onto the shutter 216 and is guided to the out ports 141 and 171.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Of the game balls flowing down the game area PE, the game ball that did not win the other ball entry section (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34, general winning port 31a to 31d) upstream of the variable winning device 201 Are all derived in a predetermined area (area where the receiving area RA is formed). In this case, when the variable winning device 201 is switched to the open state by the player looking at the flow of gaming balls gathered in the predetermined area, an impression that the variable winning device 201 is likely to efficiently win the gaming balls is displayed. It becomes possible to give.

  In addition, the left side flow passage forming portion 131 and the right side flow passage forming portion 161 are provided, and even if the game ball flows down any of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, the above-described lead-out to the predetermined area is performed. By doing this, the flow of gaming balls gathered in a predetermined area can be generated on a daily basis, not limited to a special gaming state such as right hitting. That is, by the player always watching the above-mentioned flow, it is possible to promote awareness that the variable winning device 201 is likely to be able to win efficiently, and it is possible to enhance the pleasure of generating the open / close execution mode.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state, the gaming ball led to the predetermined area is guided to the out ports 141 and 171. In this case, the gaming balls concentrated in the predetermined area in the normal gaming state can be appropriately released out of the gaming area PE. Thereby, it is suppressed that a game ball stays in a predetermined area | region, and ball clogging in a predetermined area | region and its periphery area | region is suppressed. For example, if ball clogging frequently occurs in these areas, the attendant of the game hall increases the chances of having the ball clogging resolved, and the player may feel bothersome or the flow of the game ball against the design intention is constructed. However, according to this embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

  The left channel forming portion 131 and the right channel forming portion 161 are provided on the left and right of the game board 24, and the variable winning device 201 is disposed between the channel forming portions 131 and 161. In this case, a predetermined area for collecting gaming balls can be set between the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, and it becomes possible to move the gaming balls to the left and right central portions of the lower area PE4. Thereby, for example, compared with the case where the predetermined area is set at the left corner or the right corner of the gaming board 24, it is possible to construct the flow of gaming balls gathered in the predetermined area in a place easily visible to the player Become. In addition, the variable winning device 201 is positioned between the flow path forming units 131 and 161, so that even if the player does not actually see the flow of the game balls, the variable winning device 201 can Can give an impression that it is easy to gather, and it becomes possible to favorably inspire the game intention.

  The first inclined portions 133 and 163 are provided in each of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, and the gaming balls are led out above the general winning openings 31a to 31d, and then the gaming balls that did not win the general winning openings 31a to 31d It is configured to lead to the variable winning device 201. For example, if the configuration is such that the game balls are efficiently paid to the variable winning device 201, the processing load inside the gaming machine with respect to the winning may increase, which may cause troubles in the operation of the gaming machine. In this respect, in the present configuration, the number of gaming balls reaching the variable winning device 201 can be reduced by constructing the flow of gaming balls so as to be closer to the variable winning device 201 after approaching the general winning openings 31a to 31d. It can be suppressed that the number of winnings to the winning device 201 becomes excessive. At this time, since the general winning openings 31a to 31d are used, it is possible to reduce the frequency of winning on the variable winning device 201 while paying out the game balls. For this reason, for example, the player's understanding can be obtained more easily than in the case of reducing the winning frequency to the variable winning device 201 by guiding the gaming ball to the out port, etc. .

  Out ports 141 and 171 are disposed on the side of the shutter 216. In this case, the game balls can be guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by utilizing the flow of the game balls on the shutters 216 in the projecting position, and the shutters 216 can be used as a guiding passage to the out ports 141 and 171 Become. In addition, since the distance between the shutter 216 and the out port 141, 171 is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from falling downward between the shutter 216 and the out port 141, 171. As a result, a separate guide path for guiding the game ball from the shutter 216 to the out ports 141 and 171 is not necessary, and the game ball guide path to the out ports 141 and 171 can be simplified.

<Modified Example 1 of First Embodiment>
In this modification, the configurations of the second inclined portions 136 and 166 and the variable winning device 201 in the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations of the second inclined portions 136 and 166 and the variable winning device 201 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. In these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the present modification, the second inclined portions 136 and 166 are provided with out ports 231 and 232. Each out port 231, 232 opens upward, and one game ball can pass through.

  The out port 231, 232 is provided at an intermediate position of the rolling surface of the gaming ball in the second inclined portion 136, 166. Specifically, the uppermost stream portion of the second inclined portion 136, 166, that is, the second 1 is provided at the end of the vertical wall portion 137, 167 side. Therefore, with respect to the out ports 141 and 171, it is possible to enter the gaming balls that have passed through the respective third flow paths formed between the first vertical wall portions 137 and 167 and the general winning openings 31a and 31d. Become. By the way, since the percentage of gaming balls flowing into the third flow path among the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area PE is small, in this modification, the operation openings 33 and 34 and the general winning openings 31a to 31d do not win. Almost all (almost) of the gaming balls are led to the arrangement area of the variable winning device 201.

  Thus, the game ball can be discharged from the game area PE in the process of guiding the game ball toward the variable winning device 201 by providing the out ports 231, 232 in the middle position of the second inclined portions 136, 166. It becomes a thing. For this reason, it becomes more difficult to predict the whereabouts of the gaming ball than in the first embodiment where the gaming ball is uniformly directed to the variable winning device 201, and attention to the flow of the gaming ball can be improved. It will be possible.

  In the above modification, the out-ports 231, 232 are provided at the most upstream portion of the second inclined portions 136, 166, but the arrangement locations of the out-ports 231, 232 are not limited to this. It is also possible to provide at an intermediate position between the uppermost stream and the lowermost stream of the second inclined portions 136 and 166. By the way, as the out port 231, 232 is brought closer to the most downstream portion of the second inclined portion 136, 166, the ball entry rate of the gaming ball to the out port 231, 232 can be increased. That is, the out-ports 231 and 232 can be used as adjusting means for adjusting the arrival rate of the gaming ball to the variable winning device 201.

  Moreover, in the said modification, although the outlet was provided in each of the 2nd inclination part 136 of the left side flow-path formation part 131, and the 2nd inclination part 166 of the right side flow-path formation part 161, those 2nd inclination parts 136 , 166 may be provided with an outlet. Furthermore, the first inclined portions 133 and 163 of the respective flow path forming portions 131 and 161 or any of the flow path forming portions are provided with an outlet opening upward, or the side of the first vertical wall portions 137 and 167 ( An out port may be provided which opens in the left and right center side of the lower area PE4.

  Next, the variable winning prize apparatus 201 according to the present modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, the variable winning device 201 according to this modification is characterized by the configuration of the shutter 216.

  In the present variation, the variable winning device 201 is provided with a deceleration means for reducing the moving speed of the game ball when the game ball moves on the shutter 216. Specifically, the upper surface 216 c of the shutter 216 is provided with a plurality of ridges 215 extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the gaming ball. Each of the ridges 215 protrudes upward from the upper surface 216 c of the shutter 216 and has a columnar shape having a semicircular cross section which is convex upward. The ridges 215 are arranged in the moving direction of the gaming ball on the shutter 216 (in the lateral direction of the gaming machine), and are arranged at predetermined intervals.

  By providing such a deceleration means, when the gaming ball is placed on the upper surface portion 216c of the shutter 216, the gaming ball moving toward the out port 141, 171 is decelerated, and the gaming ball stays on the shutter 216 The period is extended. As a result, when the gaming ball reaches the shutter 216 in the standby period between the round game and the round game (period in which the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state), before the gaming ball cuts over the shutter 216 The probability that the next round game is started (the variable winning device 201 is switched to the open state) is increased. That is, not only the game balls that reach the variable winning device 201 at the timing when the variable winning device 201 is in the open state, but also the game balls that have reached the variable winning device 201 during the standby period In addition, it is possible to expect more efficient winning. Since the ridges 215 function to block the flow of gaming balls on the shutters 216, they can also be referred to as blocking portions or blocking portions.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the variable winning device and the peripheral configuration thereof are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the variable winning prize apparatus 301 according to the present embodiment and the peripheral configuration thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. (A) of FIG. 21 is a front view of the variable winning apparatus 301 and its peripheral configuration, (b) and (c) are cross sectional views of the variable winning apparatus 301, and (a) of FIG. 22 is a variable winning apparatus 301 and its peripheral configuration. FIG. 7B is a plan view showing a rear surface portion 305 c of the open / close door 305. In these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 302 of the variable winning device 301 is formed as a front-view horizontally-long rectangular opening that opens forward, as shown in FIG. 21 (a). The size (width dimension) of the special winning opening 302 is larger than that of two game balls as viewed from the front of the game machine, and a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously. As shown in FIG. 21C, a ball passage 303 is formed behind the large winning opening 302 to guide the gaming ball having entered the large winning opening 302 to the back side of the gaming board 24 and then guided downward. ing. A prize winning prize winning sensor 302 a for detecting a gaming ball that has won a prize winning prize 302 is disposed at an intermediate position of the ball passage 303.

  The variable winning device 201 is provided with a plate-like opening / closing door 305 so as to correspond to the big winning opening 302. The open / close door 305 is rotatable in the front-rear direction about a rotation axis provided at the lower end of the special winning opening 302. The protrusion position (open position) which protrudes forward from the front of the game board 24 and opens the big winning opening 302 by this back and forth rotation, and the retracted position which covers the big prize opening 302 by suppressing the projection from the front of the game board 24 It can be displaced to the closed position).

  As shown in FIG. 21B, when the open / close door 305 is located at the retracted position, the big winning opening 302 is covered from the front by the open / close door 305, so that the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 302 is restricted. And the big winning opening 302 is closed. At that time, the front surface portion 305b of the open / close door 305 is located flush with the front surface (front surface portion 311a of the base body 311 of the variable winning device 301) of the gaming board 24 or on the back side of the gaming machine than the front surface of the gaming board 24 It has become. From this state, when the open / close door 305 is turned forward and displaced to the projecting position, a reception area RA capable of receiving the game ball is formed in front of the big winning opening 302. The reception area RA has the same shape and size as the large winning opening 302 in a front view, and the formation of the receiving area RA allows the winning of the gaming ball to the large winning opening 302. As a result, the special winning opening 302 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the height position of the open / close door 305 is set so that the open / close door 305 and the out ports 141, 171 formed in the respective flow path forming portions 131, 161 are arranged side by side. There is. Specifically, when the open / close door 305 is located at the projecting position, at least one of the rear surface portion (ball receiving portion) 305 c of the open / close door 305 is from the second inclined portion 136, 166 of each flow path forming portion 131, 161. It is set so as to be at a position lowered downward by the size of a minute. In other words, between the rear surface 305c of the open / close door 305 and the second inclined portion 136, 166, the step where the rear surface 305c of the open / close door 305 is lower than the second inclined portion 136, 166 by the diameter of the game ball A portion is formed, and the out-ports 141 and 171 are disposed in this stepped portion. With such a configuration, when the open / close door 305 is located at the projecting position, a part of the gaming ball moving on the open / close door 305 enters the out ports 141, 171.

  As in the first embodiment, the out ports 141 and 171 are open to the open / close door 305, and the size thereof is such that one game ball can pass through. Further, the front surfaces of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 in the out ports 141 and 171 and their peripheral portions are opaque, and the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is lower than that of the lower out port 321 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), a projection 325 is provided on the rear surface 305 c of the open / close door 305. The projecting portion 325 protrudes upward from the rear surface portion 305 c and is for adjusting the accessibility of the game ball moving on the open / close door 305 to the out ports 141 and 171. That is, as the number of protrusions 325 is increased or the number thereof is increased, it becomes difficult for the game balls to reach the out ports 141 and 171, and the out ports 141 and 171 are adjusted by designing them at the time of designing the gaming machine. It is possible to adjust the ease of escape of the game ball, that is, the winning rate of the game ball to the big winning opening 302.

  In the present embodiment, since the projection 325 is disposed close to the front end 305f of the open / close door 305, the game ball to the out port 141, 171 is obtained even by so-called sleep when installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall. It is possible to adjust the accessibility of the That is, the game ball can easily pass through the front end 305 f side of the open / close door 305 by increasing the sleep (the degree of forward inclination) of the pachinko machine 10, and the projection 325 easily affects the game ball. In the present embodiment, the protrusions 325 are disposed on the left and right sides of the open / close door 305, but may be disposed on either the left or the right. Further, the number of protrusions 325 is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the open / close door 305 extends in the left-right direction, and in detail, the left and right ends 305d, 305e (see FIG. 22 (b)) 2 are located in the vicinity of the vertical wall portions 138 and 168. The distance between the left and right ends 305 d and 305 e of the open / close door 305 and the out-ports 141 and 171 is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, and between the open-close door 305 and each out-port 141 and 171 located at the projecting position. The game ball does not fall from the bottom.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, on the back side of the base body 311, a variable winning drive section 219 for driving the open / close door 305 is attached. The variable winning drive unit 219 includes a solenoid as a drive source, and a link mechanism as a driving force transmission unit that transmits the driving force from the solenoid to the open / close door 305. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81. By driving the solenoid, the open / close door 305 is pivoted from the retracted position to the projecting position, and the variable winning device 301 is switched from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the opening / closing door 305 returns from the projecting position to the retracted position by the urging force of the urging means (spring etc.) and the variable winning device 301 switches from the open state to the closed state .

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the lower outlet 321 is disposed below the variable winning device 301. The lower out port 321 opens toward the front, and has a substantially elliptical shape that is laterally long in a front view. The size (width dimension) of the lower out port 321 is larger than that of two game balls as viewed from the front of the game machine, and a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously. Behind the lower out port 321, there is formed a ball passage 322 for guiding the gaming ball having entered the lower out port 321 to the back side of the game board 24. In the present embodiment, the ball passage 322 corresponding to the lower outlet 321 and the ball passage 303 corresponding to the big winning hole 302 are merged, but the ball passages 322 and 303 are not merged. It may be

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state and the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 23 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Note that in any of the normal gaming state and the open / close execution mode, the flow until the gaming balls having flowed down the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 are collected into the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301 is referred to FIG. This is the same as the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus the description is omitted.

  First, the flow of the game in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a). In the normal gaming state, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the variable winning device 301 is kept in the closed state. In such a state, when the gaming balls passed through the second inclined portions 136 and 166 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 and the areas PE4a to PE4c are drawn out to the variable winning device 301 side, those gaming balls are not Also, it passes in front of the open / close door 305 and flows downward toward the lower out port 321. That is, all the gaming balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301 in the normal gaming state enter the lower out port 321 and are discharged from the gaming area PE.

  Next, the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, when the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 301 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and thereafter switching control from the open state to the closed state is performed at least once (1 in this embodiment). A round game to be played is executed, and in the opening / closing execution mode, such a round game is played a plurality of times (15 times in the present embodiment). In the open state of the variable winning device 301, the open / close door 305 is located at the projecting position, whereby a reception area RA (see FIG. 21C) capable of receiving the game ball to the big winning opening 302 is formed. The winning of the game ball to 302 is permitted. On the other hand, in the closed state, when the open / close door 305 is located at the retracted position, the reception area RA disappears, and the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 302 is restricted.

  Then, in the game area PE, as in the case of the first embodiment, the game balls are integrated in the area where the reception area RA is formed. Therefore, under the situation where the open / close door 305 is in the projecting position and the variable winning device 301 is in the open state, when the game balls reach the formation area of the reception area RA, all the game balls flow into the reception area RA. Do. The gaming ball having flowed into the receiving area RA in this way falls onto the rear surface 305 c of the open / close door 305, and then travels backward on the rear surface 305 c to win a prize winning opening 302. In addition, some gaming balls move in the left-right direction on the rear surface portion 305 c of the open / close door 305. And when it gets over the projection 325, it enters the out ports 141 and 171 and is discharged from the game area PE. As described above, when the game ball is won in the large winning opening 302, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out, but the game ball enters the out port 141, 171. There is no payout of gaming balls.

  On the other hand, when the game ball reaches the formation area of the reception area RA under the condition that the open / close door 305 is in the retracted position and the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, the game ball is opened and closed as in the normal game state. Passes in front of the door 305 and enters the lower outlet 321.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A predetermined area (accepting area RA is formed) with all the game balls that did not win in the other ball entry units (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34, and general winning ports 31a to 31d) upstream of the variable winning device 301 In the above-described embodiment, the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained.

  In the case where the lower out port 321 and the out ports 141 and 171 are provided and the game ball enters the lower out port 321 when the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, the variable winning device 301 is in the open state To the out-ports 141 and 171. The following effects are expected by this.

  If the gaming ball wins the variable winning device 301 too efficiently, it may be advantageous to the player side, which may cause problems in operation in the gaming hall. When such a disadvantage is expected at the design stage of the gaming machine, the flow-down path of the gaming ball may be reviewed to adjust the winning rate to the variable winning device 301. In this case, if the game ball is led out to the out-door side and the winning rate of the game ball to the variable winning device 301 is lowered, the gaming intention may be lowered, which is not desirable.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, the above problem is dealt with by adopting a configuration in which the out port for discharging the game ball is switched according to the operation state of the variable winning device 301. That is, since the gaming ball enters the lower out port 321 when the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is discharged through the lower out port 321 in the gaming state where the open / close execution mode is not executed. In the game, since the period during which the opening / closing execution mode is not performed is likely to be longer for a longer period than the period during which the opening / closing execution mode is performed, the player should routinely see the game ball discharged through the lower out port 321 The lower out port 321 is a discharge port of the game ball, and awareness that the game ball entering the lower out port 321 becomes an out ball is promoted. In addition, when the variable winning device 301 is in the open state, the game ball is discharged not through the lower out port 321 but through another out port 141, 171. Since there is a preconception that the lower out port 321 is an out port, it is suppressed that the player recognizes this as the discharge of the game ball even if the game ball is made to enter the out port 141, 171. For this reason, it is possible to discharge the game balls that did not win a prize in the open variable prize device 301 while making the discharge less noticeable. As a result, it is possible to adjust the winning percentage of the gaming ball to the variable winning device 301 while suppressing the decline in the gaming intention.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, since the game is configured to enter the out port 141, 171 via the open / close door 305 at the projecting position, the game in which the game ball is concentrated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301 It is also possible to maintain the flow of balls. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the winning percentage of the gaming ball to the variable winning device 301 while giving an impression that the gaming ball is likely to be close to the variable winning device 301.

  The visibility of the out-ports 141 and 171 from the front view (the front view from the front of the gaming machine) is lower than that of the lower out-port 321. In this case, the presence of the out-ports 141 and 171 is diluted compared to the lower out-port 321, and the player's attention to the out-ports 141 and 171 is suppressed from increasing. As a result, the discharge of the game balls through the out ports 141 and 171 can be made even less noticeable.

  In addition, in lightening the presence of the out-ports 141 and 171 while emphasizing the lower out-port 321, a display (for example, “OUT”) indicating or indicating that the out-port is the lower side, for example, The display may be provided on the side of the out-port 321 such as on the periphery of the lower out-port 321, or on the decorative body if the decorative body is disposed in front of the lower out-port 321, etc. To the out-ports 141 and 171, or to make the display less noticeable than that of the lower out-port 321 (for example, to make the display smaller or , Etc.).

  The out ports 141 and 171 are disposed upstream of the lower out port 321. In the gaming machine, the out port is often arranged at the lowermost portion (the most downstream portion) of the gaming area PE, and it is assumed that there are not many cases where the player plays with such preconception. This configuration uses this, and by arranging the out-ports 141 and 171 upstream of the lower out-port 321, the player can recognize the out-ports 141 and 171 as an out-port at first glance. Can be suppressed.

  The out ports 141 and 171 are disposed adjacent to the open / close door 305. When the game ball moving on the rear surface portion 305 c of the open / close door 305 passes through the open / close door 305 when the open / close door 305 is in the projecting position, the game ball is rapidly entered into the out port 141, 171 Can. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the flow of the gaming balls from the opening / closing door 305 to the out ports 141, 171, and the entering of the gaming balls into the out ports 141, 171 becomes even less noticeable. . Moreover, the distance between the open / close door 305 and the special winning opening 302 can be shortened by bringing the out ports 141, 171 and the open / close door 305 adjacent to each other. As a result, it is possible to cause the out-ports 141 and 171 to enter the ball while making it appear as if the game ball is winning in the big winning opening 302, and it becomes possible to make the discharge more inconspicuous.

  The distance between the out ports 141 and 171 and the open / close door 305 is less than the diameter of the gaming ball. For example, if the game ball falls from between the out-ports 141 and 171 and the open / close door 305, the player visually recognizes the game ball falling from the open / close door 305, resulting in an impression that the game ball is likely to spill. It may be easier to hold. In this respect, in the present configuration, since the game ball is prevented from falling from between the out ports 141 and 171 and the opening and closing door 305, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player an impression of being prone to spilling the game ball. It is possible to preferably suppress the decline in gaming intention.

  In the above embodiment, the game ball can not enter the lower out-hole 321 in the open state, but can enter in the range where it is difficult to enter the ball compared to the closed state. It is good also as composition. In addition, basically, the game ball does not enter the out ports 141 and 171 in the closed state, but it is possible to enter in the range where it is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state. Good.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the variable winning device and the peripheral configuration thereof are different from those in the above-described embodiments. Hereinafter, the variable winning prize apparatus 401 according to the present embodiment and the peripheral configuration thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. (A) of FIG. 24 is a front view of the variable winning apparatus 401 and its peripheral structure, (b) is a cross sectional view thereof, (a) of FIG. 25 is a cross sectional view of the variable winning apparatus 401, (b) is an opening / closing member 431 and FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 401 and its peripheral structure. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted. Moreover, in FIG.24 (b) and FIG. 25 (a), illustration of the left side flow-path formation part 131 is abbreviate | omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the variable winning device 401 is provided with a plate-like base body 411, and the base body 411 is fitted into an opening formed at the bottom of the game board 24, It is attached to the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 24B, the distance between the front surface 411a of the base body 411 and the window panel 62 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass in front of the front surface 411a. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), a first winning opening 403 is formed in the upper portion of the base body 411 so as to be opened forward of the gaming machine. The first winning opening 403 has a rectangular shape in front view and width, and the size (width dimension) is larger than that for two game balls when viewed from the front of the game machine, and a plurality of game balls are simultaneously It is possible to pass.

  At the back of the first winning opening 403, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), after the gaming ball in the first winning opening 403 is guided to the back side of the game board 24, the first guiding is performed downward. A ball passage 405 is formed. At a midway position of the first ball passage 405, a first large winning opening winning sensor 403a for detecting a game ball winning in the first winning opening 403 is disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 24B, a passage portion 408 through which gaming balls can pass is formed in front of the base body 411 below the first winning opening 403. The bottom of the passage portion 408 is divided by the inner rail portion 51, and the out ports 441 and 442 are disposed on the left and right sides of the passage portion 408 (see FIGS. 24A and 26A). The out-ports 441 and 442 are provided below the out-ports 141 and 171 in the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, and both are laterally directed to face the passage portion 408 side. It is open.

  A second winning opening 404 is formed at the lower center of the passage portion 408 so as to penetrate the base body 411 in the thickness direction. The second winning opening 404 is formed as a substantially oval opening in a front view horizontally long opening in the front, and its size (width) is larger than that of two game balls when viewed from the front of the game machine. A plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, a second ball passage 421 is provided on the back side of the base body 411 so as to communicate with the second winning opening 404. The second ball passage 421 extends rearward, and the gaming balls having won the second winning opening 404 are introduced into the second ball passage 421 and guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 421a. At a midway position of the second ball passage 421, a second large winning opening winning sensor 404a for detecting a game ball winning in the second winning opening 404 is disposed.

  As described above, the variable winning device 401 of the present embodiment is provided with two winning opening portions 403 and 404 as winning openings capable of winning game balls, and the special winning opening 402 is provided by these winning opening portions 403 and 404. It is configured. The first large winning opening winning sensor 403a and the second large winning opening winning sensor 404a are electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the detection areas of the large winning opening prize sensors 403a and 404a are used. When the game ball passes, predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81. The main control device 81 determines the presence or absence of a winning on the special winning opening 402 based on the detection information.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the variable winning device 401 is provided with an opening / closing member 431 so as to correspond to the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404.

  The opening and closing member 431 is provided with a first opening and closing plate 432 for opening and closing the first winning opening 403, and can be pivoted back and forth around a rotation axis provided at the lower end of the first winning opening 403 ing. By the forward and backward rotation, the first open / close plate 432 protrudes forward from the front surface (front surface 411a of the base body 411) of the game board 24 (see FIGS. 25A and 26B), and It can be displaced to a retracted position (see FIGS. 24 (b) and 26 (a)) in which the projection from the front surface of the board 24 is suppressed.

  When the first opening and closing plate 432 is located at the retracted position, the first winning opening 403 is covered by the first opening and closing plate 432 from the front, whereby the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403 is restricted. The first winning opening 403 is closed. At that time, the front surface portion 432 b of the first opening / closing plate 432 is positioned flush with the front surface of the game board 24 or on the rear side of the game machine than the front surface of the game board 24. From this state, when the opening and closing member 431 is pivoted forward and the first opening and closing plate 432 is located at the projecting position, winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403 is permitted, and the first winning opening 403 is opened. It will be open. In the closed state, the first winning opening 403 does not necessarily have a configuration in which the game ball can not win, but may be able to win in a range where it is difficult to win as compared to the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, the front surface portion 432b of the first opening and closing plate 432 is provided with a second opening and closing plate 433 for opening and closing the second winning opening 404. The second opening and closing plate 433 is formed to project from the front surface portion 432b of the first opening and closing plate 432 to the front of the gaming machine when the first opening and closing plate 432 is in the retracted position. The depth dimension (the amount of forward projection from the first opening and closing plate 432) of the second opening and closing plate 433 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can be placed on the second opening and closing plate 433.

  The second opening and closing plate 433 is integrated with the first opening and closing plate 432, and is configured to rotate back and forth with the rotation of the opening and closing member 431. The second open / close plate 433 protrudes forward from the front surface (front surface 411a of the base body 411) of the game board 24 by this forward and backward rotation, and the projection position where the upper surface 433b faces upward (FIGS. 24 (b) and 26). (See (a)), and the protrusion of the second opening and closing plate 433 is suppressed, and the upper surface portion 433b can be displaced to the retracted position (see FIGS. 25 (a) and 26 (b)). .

  The second opening and closing plate 433 extends in the left-right direction, and in detail, the left and right end portions thereof are located in the vicinity of the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161. Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the depth dimension (the length of projection from the first opening and closing plate 432) of the second opening and closing plate 433 has the front end portion 433a of the second opening and closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 at the protruding position. The interval (distance) D1 is set to be less than the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, when the second opening and closing plate 433 is located at the projecting position and the passage portion 408 is covered from the upper side by the second opening and closing plate 433, the game ball is from both the front and the side of the second opening and closing plate 433. It can not flow into the passage portion 408, and the flow of gaming balls into the passage portion 408 is restricted. Thereby, the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is restricted, and the second winning opening 404 is closed. In the closed state, the second winning opening 404 does not necessarily have a configuration in which the game ball can not win, but may be able to win in a range where it is difficult to win as compared to the open state.

  In addition, when the second opening and closing plate 433 is in the projecting position, the second opening and closing plate 433 protrudes to the front of the gaming machine, so that the game ball can be received by the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433. It has become. That is, the second opening and closing plate 433 functions not only as an opening and closing unit for opening and closing the second winning opening 404 but also as a ball receiving unit for receiving the game ball. As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the gaming ball received on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 is the upper surface portion in the process of displacing the second opening and closing plate 433 from the projecting position to the retracted position. It falls downward from 433b. As a result, the gaming balls flow into the passage portion 408, and a winning of the second winning opening 404 becomes possible. The upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 is provided with a plurality of convex streaks 215 (deceleration means), and the stay period of the game ball on the second opening and closing plate 433 is prolonged.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, when the second opening and closing plate 433 is positioned at the retracted position, the first opening and closing plate 432 is positioned at the protruding position, but in this case, in the present embodiment, The distance D2 between the upper end portion 432a of the opening and closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball can pass in front of the first opening and closing plate 432. At that time, in the second opening and closing plate 433, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the central portion 433 c protrudes forward than the first opening and closing plate 432, and the distance from the window panel 62 becomes narrow. The portion is located rearward of the first opening and closing plate 432. In these parts, the distance from the window panel 62 is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball that has passed the front of the first opening and closing plate 432 flows into the passage part 408 through the part.

  In this manner, when the second opening / closing plate 433 is switched from the projecting position to the retracted position, and during a period in which the second opening / closing plate 433 is maintained at the retracted position, winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is permitted. And the second winning opening 404 is opened. However, in addition to the winning of the second winning opening 404 due to the drop from the second opening and closing plate 433 occurs only at the time of switching from the projecting position of the second opening and closing plate 433 to the retracted position, the maintenance period to the retracted position In the above, the winning of the second winning opening 404 occurs only when the game ball passes near the window panel 62. For this reason, the winning probability of the gaming ball to the second winning opening 404 is lower than the winning probability for the first winning opening 403.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 24A, the second opening and closing plate 433 has a mountain shape in a front view, and the second opening and closing plate 433 is received by the upper surface portion 433b like the shutter 216 according to the first embodiment. It is possible to lead the game ball to the out ports 141, 171. The positional relationship between the second opening and closing plate 433 relative to the out opening 141 and 171, the distance between the out opening 141 and 171 and the second opening and closing plate 433, etc., and the shutter according to the first embodiment. The description is omitted because it is the same as in the case of 216 and out ports 141 and 171.

  As shown in FIG. 24B, on the rear side of the base body 411, a variable winning drive unit 419 for driving the opening and closing member 431 is attached. The variable winning drive unit 419 includes a solenoid as a drive source, and a link mechanism as a driving force transmission unit that transmits the driving force from the solenoid to the opening / closing member 431. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81. From the state where the first opening and closing plate 432 is at the retracted position and the second opening and closing plate 433 is at the projecting position by driving the solenoid, the first opening and closing plate 432 is at the retracted position and the second opening and closing plate 433 is at the retracted position. In the state, the opening and closing member 431 is turned, and the closed state in which the winning opening portions 403 and 404 (large winning hole opening 402) are closed is switched to the opening state in which they are released. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the opening / closing member is in a state in which the first opening / closing plate 432 is in the retracted position and the second opening / closing plate 433 is in the protruding position by the biasing force of biasing means (spring etc.) 431 returns and switches from the open state to the closed state.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the gaming ball having flowed into passage portion 408 can be discharged through out ports 441 and 442, so the through hole provided at the lower center of passage portion 408 serves as second winning opening portion 404. Although it works, as shown in FIG. 27, the out ports 441 and 442 may be omitted, and the second winning opening 404 may be opened upward. In FIG. 27, the second opening and closing plate 433 is omitted in order to make the second winning opening 404 intelligible.

  Next, distribution of jackpot types according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is an explanatory view for explaining the distribution table. The distribution table is a table for distributing the type of the jackpot result based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and is stored in the distribution table storage area 113b (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 113.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the present embodiment, in the sorting table, explicit 15R probability variation jackpot results (explicit high probability correspondence gaming result) and implicit 15R probability variation jackpot results (invisible high probability) as the type of jackpot result The corresponding game result or the latent probability change state) and the 15R normal jackpot result are set.

  The explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery is the jackpot state winning, and the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode. The implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. The 15R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  In the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result, although the success or failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as in the case of the 15R normal jackpot result. In this case, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode as the gaming state despite the fact that the support mode of the motorized winning object 34a is common to the low frequency support mode. This makes it possible for the player to make the implicit 15R probability variation big hit result and 15R normal big hit result indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish, and it is interesting to predict whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It becomes possible to give

  In the distribution table shown in FIG. 28, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” correspond to the explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result, and “10 to 19” is the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot Corresponding to the result, “20 to 29” corresponds to the 15R normal jackpot result, but the distribution of these numerical values is arbitrary.

  Next, in the present embodiment, each control process executed by the MPU 112 of the main control apparatus 81 will be described.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the change start process. This processing is executed in step S305 of the game number control processing (FIG. 14).

  In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, a propriety determination process is performed to determine whether the hold information referred to in the current fluctuation start process corresponds to a big hit. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the above grasped information refers to the information corresponding to the big hit, with reference to the success or failure table for the low probability mode stored in the success or failure table storage area 113a of the ROM 113. If the specified or not lottery mode is the high probability mode, the information grasped as described above is referred to with reference to the high / low probability table for high probability mode stored in the high / low probability table storage area 113 a of the ROM 113. Identify if it is included in the information corresponding to the winning.

  In the following step S702, it is determined whether the result of the success or failure determination process in step S701 is a result corresponding to a big hit. If the result corresponds to the big hit, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

  In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for type determination, that is, information acquired from information updated by the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, referring to the distribution table (FIG. 28) stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113, it is specified whether the information for type judgment grasped above is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation big hit result .

  In the subsequent step S704, it is determined based on the information identified in the type determination process in step S703 whether or not the type of the current big hit is a probability change big hit result. If the result is a definite variation big hit result, the stop result setting process for the definite variation big hit is executed in step S705, and if it is not the definite variation big hit result, a termination result setting process for normal jackpot is executed in step S706. If it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot has not been won, in step S707, stop result setting processing for disconnection is performed.

  In each stop result setting process of step S705 to step S707, information on the pattern aspect to be finally displayed on the main display unit 43 as a stop is referred to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 113. The identification information is stored in the RAM 114. In addition, in step S705 and step S706, information for specifying with the MPU 112 that the success or failure judgment result of the current game round is the big hit result (explicit 15R probability variation jackpot flag, implicit 15R probability variation jackpot flag, 15R normal jackpot Flag) is stored in various flag storage areas 114 e of the RAM 114.

  After one of the processes in step S705 to step S707 is performed, in step S708, a process of setting a fluctuation display time in which fluctuation display is performed is performed. In the subsequent step S709, the variation command and the type command are set. The fluctuation command includes the presence or absence of a jackpot, information on the presence or absence of reach, and information on a fluctuation display time. Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the classification command includes information on explicit 15R probability variation jackpot results, information on implicit 15R probability variation jackpots, information on 15R regular jackpot results, information on deviation results, and the like as information on game results.

  The variation command and type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 transmits the variation command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 grasps the fluctuation display pattern in the symbol display device 41 in the game run based on the received fluctuation command and type command, and the symbol display device is executed so that the grasped fluctuation display pattern is executed Display control 41. Thereafter, after the variation display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 43 in step S710, the present variation start processing is ended.

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the special winning opening / closing process in the present embodiment. Here, the processing of steps S801 and S802 shown in FIG. 30 is executed between step S509 and step S510 in the special winning opening / closing process of FIG. In step S509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the variable winning device 401 based on the detection state of the special winning opening prize sensors 403a and 404a, and step S510 is the value of the prize counter PC. It is a process to update.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S509, that is, when it is detected that the game ball has won the variable winning device 401, in step S801, the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening prize sensor 404a. It is determined whether or not it has been done. As a result of the determination, if the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening prize sensor 404a, the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening prize sensor 404b in step S802, that is, , And a second winning opening command indicating that the gaming ball has won in the second winning opening 404. The second winning opening command set in step S802 is output to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13).

  After execution of step S802 or when a negative determination is made in step S801, the process proceeds to step S510, and the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by one.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that a game ball has been awarded to the variable winning device 401 (large winning opening 402), it is determined whether or not it is a prize to the second winning opening 404. I have to. However, the winning counter PC is updated without distinction between the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 in units of winning on the special winning opening 402. Therefore, when the sum of the number of winning prizes for the respective prize winning openings 403 and 404 reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 10, refer to step S 506 in FIG. 16), the variable winning prize device 401 The open state is switched to the closed state.

<Notification production control processing>
Next, the notification effect control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the notification effect control process.

  The notification effect control process is a process for performing a notification effect during the execution of the open / close execution mode, and is activated every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec). In the notification effect control process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition of the notification effect is satisfied, and when it is determined that the condition is satisfied, control is performed such that the notification effect is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  Specifically, first, in step S901, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is being executed. This determination is performed based on whether the opening command from the main control device 81 has been received. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the present notification effect control process is ended, while if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the present jackpot result is the implicit probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot in step S902. It is determined whether it is a result. This determination is performed based on the type command from the main control device 81.

  As a result of the determination, if the present jackpot result is neither an implicit definite jackpot result nor a normal jackpot result, that is, an explicit probability variation jackpot result, the present presentation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the present jackpot result is either an implicit definite jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S903, and it is determined whether or not the opening period is underway. If it is determined that the opening period is in progress, the introduction effect setting process is executed in step S904.

  Here, the introduction effect is described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). The introduction effect is a game effect to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and whether the game state (lottery mode) after the open / close execution mode ends is either the high probability mode or the low probability mode It is executed as a preliminary effect of the notice effect to be specified. In the introduction effect, an egg image 461 in which “?” Is displayed and a warrior character image 462 having a sword are displayed. Although illustration is omitted, character display such as "may be good if 20 or more gaming balls are made to win in the second winning opening 404" may be displayed.

  Further, in the introduction effect, a jackpot symbol image 463 indicating the main symbols stopped and displayed on the activated lines L1 to L5 in the game round where the jackpot result is obtained is displayed. In the present embodiment, in the case of the implicit probability variation jackpot result, as in the case of the normal jackpot result, the same even symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed on any of the valid lines L1 to L5. For this reason, the player can not identify from the stop result on the pay lines L1 to L5 whether the result is the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result.

  Further, in the introduction effect, a count image 464 indicating the number of winning on the second winning opening 404 is displayed. In the present embodiment, when a winning on the second winning opening 404 is detected, a display is performed in which the warrior character image 462 swings the sword down to the egg image 461 and the numerical value displayed on the count image 464 is It is counted up. These displays serve as a notification corresponding to the occurrence of a winning on the second winning opening 404.

  Returning to the explanation of the notification effect control process of FIG. 31, in step S904 (introduction effect setting process), the display control device is performed so that the derivation effect of FIG. 32 (a) is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Set the output command to 212. The display control device 212 controls display of the symbol display device 41 based on the command.

  After execution of step S904 or when a negative determination is made in step S903, it is determined in step S905 whether a notification effect or an end effect described later has been executed. If the effects have been executed, the main CPU ends the notification effect control process, while if it is not executed, whether or not the second winning opening command from the main control device 81 has been received in step S906. judge. The second winning opening command is output when the main control device 81 detects that the game ball has won the second winning opening 404, and the second winning opening command has been received. In step S 907, the value of the second winning counter SPC is incremented by one and updated. The second winning counter SPC is for managing the winning number of gaming balls to the second winning opening 404 in the effect control device 82, and is stored in the RAM 244. In step S 907, an output command to the display control device 212 is set so as to update the display of the count image 464 described above.

  After execution of step S 907 or when a negative determination is made in step S 906 (when a new second winning opening command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S 908, and the value of the second winning counter SPC is a predetermined number (for example, 20) It is determined whether it is above or not. If it is determined that the value of the second winning counter SPC is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, notification effect setting processing is executed in step S909.

  Here, the notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c). The notification effect is a game effect that notifies (specifies) whether or not the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished is the high probability mode. If the jackpot result is an implicit probability variation jackpot result, that is, if the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), from among the broken eggs “ While displaying the image 465 in which the character of a definite variation appears, the warrior character image 462 of the delightful appearance is displayed. On the other hand, if the jackpot result is usually the jackpot result, that is, if the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. While the image 466 in which the character of "normal" appears is displayed, the warrior character image 462 in the state which runs out is displayed. By looking at these displays, the player can clearly know whether the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

  Returning to the explanation of the notice effect control process of FIG. 31, in step S909 (notice effect setting process), the notice effect of FIG. 32 (b) or FIG. 32 (c) is displayed on the symbol display device 41 according to the type of big hit result. An output command to the display control device 212 is set so as to be performed on the screen G.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in step S908 is negative, that is, if the value of the second winning counter SPC is less than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S910, and the current round game is a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 10R). Determine if there is. When it is determined that the number is not the predetermined number of rounds, the main control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number is the predetermined number, the end effect setting process is executed in step S911.

  In the end effect, as shown in FIG. 32D, the egg image 461 in a non-broken state is displayed, and the warrior character image 462 in a dreaded state is displayed. In this case, the egg image 461 has a display of “?” So that the player can not distinguish whether the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Do. In this case, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the player proceeds to play the game while it is uncertain whether or not the high probability mode is selected. In step S911 in FIG. 31, an output command to the display control device 212 is set so that the end effect is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the number of winning game balls to the second winning opening 404 has not reached the predetermined number by the end of the round game for the predetermined number of rounds, it is determined that the time has expired. It is configured to display an effect. For this reason, the player strongly desires that the winning of the second winning opening 404 be achieved quickly, and a feeling of frustration and tension is suitably aroused. Thereby, it is possible to enliven the game compared to the case where it only vaguely digests the open / close execution mode.

  After execution of step S909 or step S911, "0" is inputted and cleared to the value of the second winning counter SPC in step S912. After that, the main CPU ends the notification effect control process.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state and the open / close execution mode will be described. Note that in any of the normal gaming state and the open / close execution mode, the flow until the gaming balls having flowed down the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 are collected into the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301 is referred to FIG. This is the same as the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus the description is omitted.

  First, the flow of the game in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (a). In the normal gaming state, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the variable winning device 401 continues to be in the closed state. In the closed state in this case, the rotational position of the opening and closing member 431 is such that the first opening and closing plate 432 closes the first winning opening 403 and the second opening and closing plate 433 closes the second winning opening 404. It is in the set state. In this state, as described above, the second opening and closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion, and it becomes possible to receive the game balls flowing down the game area PE. Then, the gaming balls received by the second opening and closing plate 433 are guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by the second opening and closing plate 433 and enter the out ports 141 and 171. That is, the gaming balls collected in the placement area of the variable winning device 401 in the normal gaming state enter either of the left and right out ports 141 and 171 and are discharged from the gaming area PE.

  Next, the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 33, the “attainment ball” means the gaming ball that has reached the placement area of the variable winning device 401.

  When the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode, a round game in which the switching control to switch the closed variable state to the closed state is performed at least once (once in this embodiment) is executed. Also, in the open / close execution mode, such round games are performed multiple times (15 times in the present embodiment).

  In the open state of the variable winning device 401, the opening and closing member 431 is rotated forward (see FIG. 26 (b)), the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 are opened, respectively. The winning of the game ball to the winning opening portion 403, 404 is permitted. For this reason, the game ball which has reached the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 at the timing when the variable winning device 401 is in the open state wins either of the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 (FIG. 33). Timing t1 to t4). In this case, as described above, the winning probability of the gaming ball to the second winning opening 404 is lower than the winning probability for the first winning opening 403.

  When the variable winning device 401 is in the closed state, both the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 are closed, while the second opening / closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion. In other words, the gaming ball that has reached the placement area of the variable winning device 401 at the timing that is the standby period (period in which the variable winning device 401 is closed and waits for the start of the next round game) , And falls on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433. Then, when the next round game is started before the gaming ball reaches the out port 141, 171, that is, under the situation where it is present on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 (the variable winning device 401 is again When the game ball is switched to the open state), the game ball falls downward to win a prize in the second winning opening 404 (timing t5, t6 in FIG. 33).

  In addition, when the game ball on the second opening and closing plate 433 reaches the out ports 141 and 171 before the next round game is started, the game ball does not win in the second winning opening 404 and is out. The game area PE is discharged from the game area PE through the ports 141 and 171. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the second open / close plate 433 is provided with the ridge portion 215 as a decelerating means, and the stay period of the game ball on the second open / close plate 433 is prolonged. That is, the game balls that have reached the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 during the waiting period are preferentially treated so that the second winning opening 404 can be easily won.

  Although the above description is given for the waiting period between rounds, the arrangement of the variable winning device 401 during the closing period before the execution of the first round (the period in which the variable winning device 401 is closed immediately before the start of the first round) The same applies to the game balls that have reached the area. That is, when the first round game is started under the situation where the gaming ball is present on the second opening and closing plate 433, the gaming ball is to be won in the second winning opening 404.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, not only when the variable winning device 401 is in the open state, but also for the game balls that have reached the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 when in the closing state, the winning of the variable winning device 401 is achieved. Is possible. Then, when the number of winning in the second winning opening 404 becomes 20 or more before the end of the 10th round game, a notification effect (FIG. 32) is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. The notification is executed corresponding to the lottery mode (playing state) after the open / close execution mode ends.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The second opening and closing plate 433 is provided on the opening and closing member 431, and when the variable winning device 401 is in the closed state, the second opening and closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion, and further, based on switching from the closed state to the open state. 2) The game ball received by the opening and closing plate 433 is configured to be able to win a prize in the second prize opening portion 404.

  When the open / close execution mode is executed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient winning on the big winning opening and to suppress wasteful consumption of the game balls. For this reason, depending on the player, there may be a case where a so-called stop is performed, such as refraining from launching the gaming ball at a timing at which it is difficult for a winning to the big winning opening to occur. However, if such technical intervention is performed excessively, the fairness of the game is disturbed and undesirable.

  In this respect, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the game ball is fired at a timing at which winning of the first winning opening 403 is unlikely to occur, the second opening / closing plate 433 (ball receiving portion) It becomes possible to make 2 winning prize mouth section 404 win. As a result, it becomes possible to obtain benefits efficiently while suppressing the generation of wasted balls, and it is possible to have a configuration suited to the needs of the player. Not only that, it is also possible to suppress the ramping of the strikes, which is advantageous in securing the fairness of the game.

  In addition, the game ball received by the second opening and closing plate 433 can win not the first winning opening 403 but the second winning opening 404. For example, if the game ball falling from the second opening and closing plate 433 is configured to win a prize at the first winning opening 403, the winning ball is the same as the winning ball by opening the first winning opening 403. In the machine 10, it may be difficult to identify which route a game ball has won. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the winning destination of the gaming ball is different between the case of winning by falling from the second opening and closing plate 433 and the case of winning without passing through the fall, either of the pachinko machines 10 It becomes easy to identify whether you have won the route. For this reason, the former case can be easily made more advantageous than the latter case, and an advantageous configuration can be provided to evoke a special feeling for winning through the falling from the second opening and closing plate 433.

  In addition, for example, in the configuration in which the first winning opening portion 403 is made to receive a game ball received by the second opening and closing plate 433 (ball receiving portion), the game ball heading toward the first winning opening portion 403 through the ball receiving portion There is a concern that the game balls directly heading to the first winning opening 403 may interfere with each other, and the respective winnings may be inhibited. In this respect, in the present configuration, occurrence of such an inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by separating the winning opening through the ball receiving portion and the winning opening without the ball.

  The second winning opening 404 is made to win by dropping the gaming ball received on the second opening / closing plate 433 downward. In this case, the gaming balls on the second opening and closing plate 433 can be guided to the second winning opening 404 by utilizing the forward rotation of the opening and closing member 431, and the configuration can be simplified. Further, by switching from the closed state to the open state, the ball receiving state of the second opening and closing plate 433 is reset together with the winning of the second winning opening 404 of the game ball received by the second opening and closing plate 433. Can. As a result, when the variable winning device 401 is returned from the open state to the closed state, it becomes possible to start a new ball reception without the gaming ball remaining on the second opening and closing plate 433.

  Further, the second winning opening 404 is disposed below the second opening and closing plate 433 and is opened upward. In this case, the game ball dropped from the second opening and closing plate 433 can be easily made to win the second winning opening 404. In addition, the passage of the gaming ball from the second opening and closing plate 433 to the second winning opening 404 can be simplified, and the occupied area of the passage in the game area PE can be made smaller than in the case where the passage becomes complicated. Becomes possible. That is, the configuration can be optimized in the gaming machine in which the gaming area PE is limited.

  When the opening and closing member 431 is rotated forward to open the variable winning device 401, the distance D2 between the first opening and closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is equal to or more than the diameter of the gaming ball. In this case, the game ball passes in front of the first opening and closing plate 432 and the second winning opening 404 can be made to win. That is, it is possible to expect double winnings to the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404, and compared with a uniform game whether or not the game ball enters one winning opening, it is interesting. It is possible to improve

  The game balls received by the second opening and closing plate 433 are led out to the out ports 141 and 171. In this case, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and when the variable winning device 401 continues to be closed, the gaming ball received on the second opening / closing plate 433 is guided to the out port 141, 171 and appropriately discharged from the game area PE. can do. As a result, the game ball is prevented from staying on the second opening and closing plate 433 and ball clogging in the second opening and closing plate 433 and the peripheral area thereof is suppressed.

  Further, the out-ports 141 and 171 are disposed adjacent to the side of the opening and closing member 431. In this case, the game ball can be easily derived from the second opening and closing plate 433 to the out ports 141 and 171. In addition, since the distance between the second opening and closing plate 433 and the out ports 141 and 171 is short, it is determined whether the game ball remains on the second opening and closing plate 433 or the balls have been entered in the out ports 141 and 171 The visual confirmation can be performed without the movement of the line of sight, and it becomes possible to achieve the concentration of the attention point. As a result, compared with the case where visual recognition of various places is required, the diffusion of alertness can be suppressed, and the player can easily concentrate on the game.

  In addition, the out-ports 141 and 171 are configured to open on the opening and closing member 431 side. In this case, the momentum of the game balls moving on the second opening and closing plate 433 can be used to smoothly enter the out ports 141 and 171, and the flow of the game balls on the second opening and closing plate 433 stagnates. Can be suppressed. In addition, since it is possible to enter the out-ports 141 and 171 as it is without changing the moving direction of the gaming balls, the structure for deriving the gaming balls to the out-ports 141 and 171 can be simplified.

  When a predetermined number of winnings on the second winning opening 404 is detected, a notification effect is generated to notify whether it is a probability change big hit result or a normal big hit result, and the first winning opening part 403 It is more advantageous for the player to win the second winning opening 404 than to win the second prize. In this case, the second opening and closing plate 433 receives the game balls and not only suppresses the generation of wasted balls, but depending on which of the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 the game ball wins, The development of the game can be differentiated (Do you proceed with the game while knowing whether or not it is the high probability mode, or advance the game with indeterminacy?). That is, it becomes a matter of great interest to the player as to which of the winning opening portions 403 and 404 wins, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, in other words, regarding the first opening and closing plate 432, the opening and closing member 431 of the first opening and closing plate 432 is closed in the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433. In some cases, it can be said that it is erected or protrudes upward, and extends in the passage direction of the upper surface portion 433b (the direction toward the out ports 141 and 171). In this case, when the opening and closing member 431 is rotated, the gaming ball on the upper surface portion 433b is dropped and allowed to flow downward below the opening and closing member 431, and a new game ball is made of the opening and closing member 431 by the first opening and closing plate 432. It is possible to suppress the inflow. As a result, the opportunity for the game ball to flow downward to the opening and closing member 431 can be limited, and the joy when the game ball falls can be increased.

  In addition, the first opening and closing plate 432 is spaced apart from the turning tip of the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 by the diameter of the gaming ball or more. It is located at the opposite end. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 431 is in the closed position (FIG. 24B), the gaming ball can be placed in front of the first opening / closing plate 432 in the upper surface portion 433b, and the opening / closing member 431 is rotated forward In the case of being located at the open position in FIG. 25 (a)), it is possible to suppress that the falling of the gaming ball from the upper surface portion 433b is inhibited by the first opening and closing plate 432. That is, the function of dropping the gaming ball received on the upper surface portion 433b and the function of suppressing further dropping of the gaming ball can be well achieved.

  Furthermore, the first opening and closing plate 432 extends over the entire length of the upper surface portion 433b in the passage direction. In this case, when the open / close member 431 is in the open position, it is possible to suppress the game ball from passing the side of the first open / close plate 432 and flowing into the passage portion 408.

  When the opening / closing member 431 is in the open position, the gaming ball is placed on the first opening / closing plate 432, and when the opening / closing member 431 returns to the closing position in that state, the first opening / closing board is in the state where the gaming ball is on There is a possibility that 432 rotates backward. In this case, the gaming ball may be caught between the first opening and closing plate 432 and the object behind the first opening and closing plate 432, and the ball may be bitten. In this respect, in the above configuration, the space portion (the first winning opening 403 and the first ball passage 405) capable of accommodating one or more game balls is provided behind the first opening / closing plate 432. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of

<Modified Example 1 of Third Embodiment>
In this modification, the configuration of the opening and closing member 431 is different from that of the third embodiment. Specifically, the dimension of the gap with the window panel 62 when the opening and closing member 431 is positioned at the open position is the third. It is narrower than the case of the embodiment of. Hereinafter, the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 401 in the open state. In this figure, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In this modification, when the open / close member 431 is rotated forward from the closed position (FIG. 24B) and displaced to the open position, the distance D2 between the upper end portion 432a of the first open / close plate 432 and the window panel 62 is The depth dimension of the first opening and closing plate 432 is set to be less than the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, the game ball can not pass in front of the first opening and closing plate 432 (opening and closing member 431), and does not flow into the passage portion 408 below the opening and closing member 431.

  Thus, in the present modification, even if the opening and closing member 431 is pivoted forward to the pivoting position where the first winning opening 403 is opened, the second winning opening 404 is not opened, and the first winning opening 403 Is configured to be open only. In this case, the winning opportunity to the second winning opening 404 can be limited only at the time of switching from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball is dropped from the second opening and closing plate 433 to the second winning opening 404. It becomes possible to highlight the game to be awarded.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the operation mode of the opening and closing member 431 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning apparatus 401 in the closed state, FIG. 36 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning apparatus 401 in the open state A, (b) is a plan view thereof, and FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 401 of FIG. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The variable winning device 401 of the present embodiment includes two open states as the open state. Specifically, an open state A (FIG. 36) in which the second winning opening 404 is in an open state and an open state B (FIG. 37) in which the first winning opening 403 is in an open state. These open states A and B are realized by adjusting the amount of rotation (rotational angle) of the opening and closing member 431 in the variable winning device 401. As a state other than the open states A and B, a closed state (FIG. 35) in which both the first prize opening portion 403 and the second prize opening portion 404 are closed can be taken. Since it is the same as the closed state (FIG. 24 (b)) according to the embodiment, the description will be omitted. In the closed state shown in FIG. 35, the distance D1 between the front end portion 433a of the second opening and closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), in the open state A, the amount of rotation of the opening / closing member 431 to the front of the gaming machine from the closed state is made the first amount of rotation. It is a thing which does not permit a prize of the game ball to the 1st prize mouth part 403 while allowing a prize of the game ball to. That is, while the first rotation amount suppresses the opening degree of the first winning opening 403 in the first winning opening 403 within a range where the game ball can not win, the upper end 432 a of the first opening and closing plate 432 and the window panel The opening and closing member 431 is rotated so that the distance D3 to 62 and the distance D4 between the left and right end portions 433d and 433e of the second opening and closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 become equal to or more than the diameter of the gaming ball. When the distances D3 and D4 are equal to or greater than the diameter of the gaming ball, first, the gaming ball flowing down from above the opening and closing member 431 passes the front of the first opening and closing plate 432 to the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 It will come on board. The game ball placed on the upper surface portion 433b moves along the slope of the upper surface portion 433b toward the left end portion 433d or the right end portion 433e, and falls below the opening / closing member 431 through the front region of the end portions 433d, 433e. Do. In this manner, the ball passage 471 through which the game ball can pass is formed, and the game ball can be won in the second winning opening 404.

  In addition, when the gaming ball is on the second opening and closing plate 433 just before switching from the closing state to the opening state A, the gaming ball falls downward from the second opening and closing plate 433 in the process of switching to the opening state A The second winning opening 404 can be won.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, in the open state B, the amount of rotation of the opening / closing member 431 to the front of the gaming machine from the closed state is set to a second amount of rotation larger than the first amount of rotation. While permitting the winning of the winning opening 403, the game ball is not allowed of winning the second winning opening 404. That is, to the second winning opening 404 while the first opening / closing plate 432 opens the first winning opening 403 to the extent that the second rotation amount allows the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403. The opening / closing member 431 is rotated so that the passage portion 408 (see FIG. 24B) connected to the opening / closing member 432 is covered from above by the first opening / closing plate 432. In the present embodiment, when the open / close member 431 is pivoted to the pivot position where the first open / close plate 432 is in the open state B, the distance D5 between the upper end portion 432a of the first open / close plate 432 and the window panel 62 Its dimensions are set to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

  Here, since the second rotation amount is to make the front rotation amount of the opening / closing member 431 from the closed state larger than the first rotation amount, switching from the closed state to the open state B is performed via the open state A. It is supposed to be done. At this time, the period in the open state A is configured to be shorter than the period in the open state B (period maintained in the open state B).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), when the gaming ball is placed on the second opening and closing plate 433 just before the switching from the closing state to the opening state B, the gaming ball is changed in the switching process to the opening state B Drops downward, and the second winning opening 404 can be won. That is, under the condition that the variable winning device 401 is in the open state B, winning on the second winning opening 404 is not permitted, but when switching to the open state B, winning on the second winning opening 404 is permitted.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning drive unit 419 includes a stepping motor as a drive source. The stepping motor is electrically connected to the main controller 81, and is driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81. Specifically, when the first drive signal is output from the main control device 81, the opening and closing member 431 is rotated so that the variable winning device 401 is in the open state A, and the second drive signal from the main control device 81 Is outputted, the open / close member 431 is rotated so that the variable winning device 401 is in the open state B. Also, when the return signal is output from the main control device 81, the opening and closing member 431 is rotated so that the variable winning device 401 is in the closed state.

  Next, distribution of the jackpot type according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 38 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table.

  In the sorting table of the present embodiment, two types of implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result A and implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result B are set as corresponding to the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result. In addition, two types of normal big hit result A and normal big hit result B are set as those corresponding to the 15R normal big hit result.

  In the case where the jackpot type is implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result A and the case where it is implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result B, the symbols displayed stopped on the main display 43 are different but symbol display When the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the device 41 (for example, the symbol combination of "444" is shown in both the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result A and the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result B) Can be displayed). As a result, it is determined that the jackpot result from the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 is indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish, and it is suppressed that the player can easily grasp the jackpot type. The same is true for the normal big hit results A and B, and the symbols stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are different, but the same symbol combination may be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41. It has become.

  The explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result is the same as the distribution table (FIG. 28) of the third embodiment.

  Next, the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of the variable winning device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). FIG. 38 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the correspondence relationship between them.

  When the jackpot type becomes an implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result A or 15R normal jackpot result A, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot results. The open state A is to open the second winning opening 404, but when the game ball is won in the second winning opening 404, as in the case of the third embodiment, That is detected by the winning prize sensor for a large winning opening 2. Then, when a predetermined number or more of the game balls in the second winning opening 404 are detected while the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the notification effects shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and (c) are executed. The lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is ended is notified. Thus, the player can clearly know whether the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type becomes implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result B or 15R normal jackpot result B, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state B in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot results. Although it is expected that winning in the second winning opening 404 can be expected at the time of switching from the closed state to the open state B, after the transition to the open state B, winning in the second prize opening 404 is not permitted. Compared to the state A, it is difficult for a winning to the second winning opening 404 to occur. For this reason, when the jackpot type becomes implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result B or 15R normal jackpot result B, the end effect shown in FIG. 32D becomes easy to be executed, and whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode The possibility of proceeding to the game after the opening / closing execution mode ends is increased while the player can not clearly grasp whether or not it is not.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the open state A is more advantageous than the open state B because the probability of being able to know the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is increased. For this reason, the fun to play in the hope that the variable winning device 401 is released in the open state A is given, and the degree of attention to the game is suitably increased.

  Note that the open state shown in FIG. 38 (b) may be for all round games executed in the open / close execution mode or may be for some round games. For example, when the jackpot type is implicit 15R probability variation big hit result B or 15R normal big hit result B, open variable B in the open state B in all rounds in the opening and closing execution mode, the implicit 15R probability variation When the jackpot result A or 15R normal jackpot result A, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in the round game from the first round to the tenth round, the remaining round games are open in the open state B Can be used.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A closed state in which the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 are both closed, an open state A in which the second winning opening 404 is open, and It is configured to be able to switch to the open state B in which the winning opening portion 403 is in the open state. This makes it possible to diversify the winning mode of the gaming ball and to improve the fun as compared to a uniform game in which only the gaming ball is inserted into one winning opening. Moreover, since such switching is realized by one opening / closing member 431, when the opening / closing member 431 operates, the winning opening that switches to the open state is not uniquely determined, and any winning opening 403, 404 An interest can be given to predict whether it will be in the open state. In addition, since it is advantageous for the player to win the game ball in the second winning opening 404 rather than the game ball winning in the first winning opening 403, either of the open states A and B is possible. Is a major concern for players. As a result, the player is expected to be more interested in the behavior of the opening and closing member 431, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  When the variable winning device 401 switches from the closed state to the open state B, it is configured to go through the open state A. In this case, the behavior of the opening and closing member 431 in the middle of switching to the opening state B can be matched with the behavior of the opening and closing member 431 when switching from the closing state to the opening state A. At this time, in the period in which the behavior of the opening / closing member 431 matches, it is not determined from the player as to which of the open states A and B is to be established. As a result, the situation in which the winning opening portions 403 and 404 in the open state are identified early from the behavior of the opening and closing member 431 is avoided, and the fun of predicting which winning opening portions 403 and 404 will be in the opening state is enhanced. be able to.

  When switching to the open state B via the open state A, the period in the open state A is shorter than the period in the open state B. For example, if the period for the open state A is longer than the period for the open state B, winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is likely to occur. As a result, the difference from the open state B may be obscured, and the significance of providing the open state B may be lost. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the winning probability of the gaming ball to the second winning opening 404 can be suppressed to a low level even though the opening state A is passed through, and appropriate differentiation from the opening state B is possible. It will be possible.

<Modified Example 1 of Fourth Embodiment>
The present modification is different from the fourth embodiment in that the open state of the variable winning device 401 is changed in one round game. Hereinafter, the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a). FIG. 39 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device 401 during one round game.

  In this modification, when one round game is started, the variable winning device 401 is switched from the closed state to the open state A (see FIG. 36) in which the second winning opening 404 is in the open state. Then, in the middle of the one round game, the variable winning device 401 is switched from the open state A to the open state B (see FIG. 37) in which the first winning opening 403 is in the open state. After that, the variable winning device based on the end condition of the round game (when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches a predetermined upper limit number or the opening period reaches a predetermined upper limit period), The open state B is switched to the closed state 401, and the round game ends.

  As described above, since the open state of the variable winning device 401 changes in the middle of the round game, the player is expected to carefully watch the behavior of the opening and closing member 431, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the attention to the game. . In addition, it is possible to diversify the flow of gaming balls and the prize mode to the variable prize device 401 as compared to the conventional gaming machine which only determines whether or not the variable prize device 401 is opened, and it is possible to improve interest. become.

  Switching from open state A to open state B in the above case is optional as long as the maintenance period of open state A (period in which second winning opening 404 is kept open) is secured to some extent, For example, based on the fact that the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 401 has reached a predetermined number smaller than the upper limit number, or the execution period of the open state A (period during which the second winning opening 404 is in the open state) Can be performed based on reaching a predetermined period shorter than the upper limit period, or based on the establishment of both.

  Further, when switching from the open state A to the open state B, the variable winning device 401 is shifted from the open state A to the open state B without returning to the closed state. In this case, as compared with the case where the variable winning device 401 is returned to the closed state and then shifted to the open state B, the amount of rotation of the opening / closing member 431 until reaching the open state B can be reduced and quick state switching is possible. become. Further, by not interposing the closed state, generation of wasted balls (occurrence of an event in which the game ball enters the out port 141, 171) is suppressed, and the variable winning device 401 can be made to win the game ball efficiently. become.

  Note that the change in the open state does not necessarily have to be performed in all round games in the open / close execution mode, and for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), it may be performed only in part of the round games. That is, the change in the open state may be performed in at least a part of round games in the open / close execution mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39C, when changing the open state of the variable winning device 401 in a plurality of round games, the change pattern of the open state may be made different. In this case, the manner of change of the open state differs depending on the round, which is effective in diversifying the winning manner of the gaming ball to the variable winning device 401.

<Modified Example 2 of Fourth Embodiment>
The present modification is different from the fourth embodiment and the first modification thereof in that the open state of the variable winning device 401 is changed in round units. Hereinafter, the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between each round and the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device 401. As shown in FIG.

  When the open / close execution mode is executed, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in the first round round game, and is open in the open state B in the second round round game unlike the first round. Ru. In the third round game, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A, and in the fourth round game, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A as in the third round.

  As described above, since the open state of the variable winning device 401 is different depending on the round, the winning mode of the gaming ball to the variable winning device 401 is different according to the round. This makes it possible to diversify the way of enjoying the round game as compared to the case where the same round game is repeated in response to the progress of the open / close execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In the above case, when switching from the first round to the second round, the variable winning device 401 is shifted from the open state A to the open state B without returning to the closed state. That is, in the second round, since the first winning opening 403 is in the open state, the closing state of the first winning opening 403 is required as the prior state, but in this modification, 1 It is regarded as being fulfilled by the open state A implemented in the round game of the round (in the open state A, the first winning opening 403 is closed (see FIG. 36)) and returns to the closed state It is made to shift to the open state B without doing it.

  In this case, as compared with the case where the variable winning device 401 is returned to the closed state and then shifted to the open state B, the amount of rotation of the opening / closing member 431 until reaching the open state B can be reduced and quick state switching is possible. become. In addition, a standby period immediately before the start of the second round (period of waiting for the start of the second round with the first winning opening 403 closed) is shared by the open state A of the first round. The second round can be started without interruption from the first round, or the second round can be started immediately after the first round, and the substantial waiting period can be eliminated or extremely short. .

  As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wasted balls (occurrence of an event in which the game ball enters the out ports 141 and 171), and it is possible to promote efficient winning on the variable winning device 401. In addition, the open / close execution mode can be advanced with good tempo, and time efficiency in playing a game can be improved.

  Further, also at the time of switching from the second round to the third round, the variable winning device 401 is shifted from the open state B to the open state A without returning to the closed state. Thereby, the same effect as the above case can be expected.

<Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment>
The present modification is different from the first and second modifications of the fourth embodiment in that the open states A and B are switched by switching the turning direction of the opening / closing member 431 from the closed state. Hereinafter, the present modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the opening and closing member 431 according to the present modification, and FIG. 42 is an explanatory view for explaining an operation mode of the opening and closing member 431. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present modification, the second opening and closing plate 483 of the opening and closing member 431 has a flat plate shape. That is, the second opening and closing plate 483 is configured such that the upper surface portion 483 b extends in a straight line (substantially horizontal) in the left-right direction in a front view from the front of the gaming machine. The second opening and closing plate 483 covers the passage portion 408 (see FIG. 24B) connected to the second winning opening 404 from above, and has a size capable of closing the passage portion 408.

  The opening and closing member 431 is rotatable in the front and rear direction about a rotation shaft portion 431a provided at the lower end of the first opening and closing plate 432, and the first opening and closing plate 432 and the second The opening and closing plate 483 is integrally pivoted. Although illustration is omitted, the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are provided in the game board 24 as in the other embodiments, and the out ports 141 and 171 are disposed on the left and right sides of the opening and closing member 431. ing.

  Next, the operation mode of the opening and closing member 431 will be described with reference to FIG. Also in this modification, the open state includes the open state A in which the second winning opening 404 is in the open state, and the open state B in which the first winning opening 403 is in the open state. And switching between the open state A and the open state B is possible.

  In the closed state, as shown in FIG. 42A, the first opening and closing plate 432 covers the first winning opening 403 from the front, and the second opening and closing plate 483 covers the passage 408 from the upper side. As a result, winning of game balls to the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 is not permitted, and both winning openings 403 and 404 are closed. In the closed state, the second opening and closing plate 483 protrudes forward, so that it is possible to receive the gaming ball flowing down from above on the upper surface portion 483 b of the second opening and closing plate 483. The game ball received by the upper surface portion 483 b moves in the left-right direction by moving along the upper surface portion 483 b and is guided to the out ports 141 and 171.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the opening and closing member 431 is pivoted forward from the closed state, the open state B is established. In the open state B, when the first opening and closing plate 432 falls forward, the first winning opening 403 is opened, and the winning of the gaming ball to the first winning opening 403 is permitted. Further, the first opening and closing plate 432 which has fallen to the front covers the passage portion 408 from the upper side, whereby the second winning opening 404 is closed.

  When a game ball is present on the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening and closing plate 483 when switching from the closed state to the open state B, the downward rotation of the second opening and closing plate 483 associated with the forward rotation of the opening and closing member 431 As a result, the gaming ball falls downward, and the second winning opening 404 can be won. That is, when the gaming ball on the second opening and closing plate 483 is switched to the opening state B, the winning opening on the opposite side to the winning opening (the first winning opening 403) on the opening side (second opening) It is possible to win a prize in the winning opening portion 404). Further, such a winning is not permitted after the switching to the open state B is completed, and is limited only in the switching process.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (c), when the opening and closing member 431 is rotated backward from the closed state, the open state A is established. In the open state A, the passage portion 408 is opened upward by the second opening and closing plate 483 being in the standing posture, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second winning opening 404 is permitted. In addition, the first winning opening 403 is put in a closed state by the second opening and closing plate 483 standing up covering the first winning opening 403 from the front.

  When a game ball is present on the upper surface portion 483 b of the second opening and closing plate 483 when switching from the closed state to the open state A, the second opening and closing plate 483 pivots toward the first winning opening 403 Thus, the game ball is guided to the first winning opening 403 and can be won in the first winning opening 403. Such a winning is not permitted after the switching to the open state A is completed, and is limited only in the switching process.

  In this modification, the second opening and closing plate 483 has a flat plate shape when the gaming ball on the second opening and closing plate 483 is guided to the first winning opening 403 side, the gaming ball is the second opening and closing plate. Although the movement to the left and right end portions of the 483 and the spillage from the second opening and closing plate 483 is suppressed, the fourth embodiment is within the range in which such spilling does not occur or is unlikely to occur. It is good also as composition which inclines towards out mouth 141 and 171 similarly to this.

  As described above, in the present modification, the open / close member 431 is in the open state B when it is pivoted forward and in the open state A when it is pivoted backward, so the player's interest in the direction in which the open / close member 431 operates is It is expected that the player pays attention to the behavior of the opening and closing member 431. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the open state A or B is associated with the operation direction of the opening / closing member 431, the player can easily grasp which state it is in an intuitive manner, and the ease of play is improved.

  In the above modification, when the switching to the open state A is completed, winning of the gaming ball to the first winning opening 403 is not possible, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that winning is possible within a range in which it is difficult to win as compared with the 2 winning opening portion 404. Similarly, even when the switching to the open state B is completed, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is not possible, compared to the first winning opening 403. It may be possible to win in a range where it is difficult to win.

<Modified Example 4 of Fourth Embodiment>
The present modification is based on the third modification of the fourth embodiment, and is devised by devising a switching mode to the open states A and B in the open / close execution mode. Hereinafter, the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (a). (A) of FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of each round, and (b) illustrates the relationship between the jackpot type and the number of switching to the open state A in the open / close execution mode FIG.

  In the present modification, even when a game ball wins on the second winning opening 404, the notification effect shown in FIG. 32 is not executed (of course neither the introduction effect nor the end effect is performed), and the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. In the effect image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, it is impossible to distinguish between the low probability mode and the high probability mode that the lottery mode after the open / close It has become. Further, when the open / close member 431 is switched to one of the open states A and B in one round game, the state is continued until the end of the round game. Furthermore, as in the case of the first modification of the third embodiment, the explicit 15R probability variation jackpot result, the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result and the 15R regular jackpot result are set in the jackpot type in this modification. (See FIG. 28).

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot type is distributed to the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result, in the first to fourth rounds and the tenth to fifteenth round games, The open / close member 431 is turned forward to be in the open state B, and the open / close member 431 is turned rearward to be in the open state A in the fifth to ninth round games. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot type is distributed to the 15R normal jackpot result, the opening / closing member 431 is forward in the first round, third round, fifth round, seventh round to fifteenth round game The open / close member 431 is turned rearward to be in the open state A in the second, fourth, and sixth round games.

  That is, the number of times the variable winning apparatus 401 is switched to the open state A differs between when the jackpot type is distributed to the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result and when it is allocated to the 15R regular jackpot result Specifically, in the former case, the number of switching to the open state A is greater than a predetermined number (four in this modification), and in the latter case, the number of switching to the open state A is less than or equal to the predetermined number Is configured as.

  Such control is performed, for example, on the basis of information on the distribution result of the jackpot type such as the main controller 81, the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2, the flag indicating the distribution result of the jackpot type, or the like. It is realized by setting the open mode of the opening and closing member 431.

  With the above-described configuration, it is possible to impart an interest of estimating the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is ended from the number of times of switching to the open state A (the behavior of the opening / closing member 431). Thus, the player's interest in the behavior of the opening and closing member 431 can be greatly enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

  In this modification, the jackpot type and the number of switching to the open state A are made to correspond one to one, but as shown in FIG. 44, when the jackpot type is distributed to the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result Is likely to occur when the number of switching to the open state A is greater than a predetermined number of times, and when the normal 15R jackpot result is distributed, the number of switching to the open state A may be less than or equal to the predetermined number of times It may be configured to be easy.

  Also, if the jackpot type is assigned to the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result, the number of switching to the open state B will be more than a predetermined number of times, and if it is usually distributed to the 15R big hit result, to the open state B The number of switching times may be equal to or less than a predetermined number.

  Furthermore, in this modification, for convenience of explanation, when the open / close member 431 is switched to any one of the open states A and B in one round game, the state is continued until the end of the round game. However, as in the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the opening aspect of the opening and closing member 431 may be changed in one round game. In this case, the number (total number) of switching to the open state A in the open / close execution mode may be different depending on whether the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result is distributed or the 15R regular jackpot result is allocated. The number of rounds including switching to the open state A may be different.

<Modification 5 of Fourth Embodiment>
This modification targets the round game in a predetermined round, and the open state of the variable winning device 401 in the case where the jackpot type is distributed to the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result and the case where it is distributed to the 15R regular jackpot result And the fourth modification are different from the fourth modification. Hereinafter, the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of the 15th round.

  In the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot type is distributed to the implicit 15R probability variation jackpot result in the present modification, the opening / closing member 431 is rotated backward in the round game of the 15th round to be in the open state A. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot type is distributed to the 15R normal jackpot result, the opening / closing member 431 is turned forward to be in the open state B in the 15th round game. In either case of the implicit 15R probability variation big hit result and the 15R normal big hit result, in the round game other than the 15th round, the open / close member 431 is turned forward to be in the open state B.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to impart an interest of estimating the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is ended from the open state of the variable winning device 401 in the 15th round. Thus, as in the case of the fourth modification, the player's interest in the behavior of the opening and closing member 431 can be greatly enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved. In addition, since it is sufficient if attention is paid to the behavior of the opening and closing member 431 in a predetermined round, the load on the player can be reduced compared to the case where all round games played in the opening and closing execution mode are targeted. .

  In addition, in this modification, although the predetermined round was made into the 15th round (final round), it is not limited to this, It can be set as arbitrary rounds. However, if the result is usually a big hit, if the player can guess it relatively early in the open / close execution mode, the player may be discouraged and may not be able to fully enjoy the remaining open / close execution mode. It is preferable that the predetermined round be a round game at the end of the open / close execution mode (the last round or the one-preceding round game).

  Further, in the present variation, the predetermined round is one round game, but may be configured from a plurality of round games. Furthermore, as in the case of FIG. 45 (b), the jackpot type and the opening mode in the predetermined round (which one of the open states A and B are to be made) are not made to correspond one to one, and the jackpot type is implicit 15R. The configuration may be such that the variable winning device 401 is more likely to be in the open state A in a predetermined round game than when it is distributed to the 15R regular jackpot result when it is distributed to the probability variation big hit result.

Fifth Embodiment
The present embodiment differs in that the variable winning device 401 according to the fourth embodiment is configured as a variable winning unit in which a plurality of variable winning devices are integrated. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 (a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 501 and its peripheral structure, and FIGS. 46 (b) and 47 are cross-sectional views of the variable winning unit 501. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the variable winning unit 501 is provided with a base body 411 similar to the variable winning device 401 according to the fourth embodiment. An upper large winning opening 505 is formed in the upper part of the base body 411, and a lower large winning opening 506 is formed in the lower part of the base body 411. The upper winning opening 505 and the lower winning opening 506 have the same configuration as the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 according to the fourth embodiment. It is opened and closed by That is, the upper variable winning device 502 is configured by the upper special winning opening 505 and the opening / closing member 431, and the lower variable winning device 503 is constituted by the lower large winning opening 506 and the opening / closing member 431.

  The operation of the specific opening / closing member 431 for opening and closing the upper winning opening 505 and the lower winning opening 506 opens and closes the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 in the fourth embodiment. 46 (b) and FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), the closed state in which both the large winning openings 505 and 506 are closed and the lower large winning opening 506 are opened. It is possible to switch between the open state A and the open state B in which the upper large winning opening 505 is opened.

  In the open state B shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the game ball wins the upper large winning opening 505, the first large winning opening winning sensor 403a is provided in the first ball passage 405 at the rear of the upper large winning opening 505. It is detected. Thus, when the winning of the gaming ball to the upper large winning opening 505 is detected, a first number (for example, 10) of gaming balls are paid out from the payout control device 97.

  On the other hand, in the open state A shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the gaming ball wins the lower large winning opening 506, the second large winning opening provided in the second ball passage 421 behind the lower large winning opening 506 That is detected by the prize sensor 404a. Thus, when the winning of the gaming ball to the lower side big winning opening 506 is detected, a second number (for example, 15) of gaming balls larger than the first number are paid out from the payout control device 97. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain many winning balls by winning the game ball in the lower large winning opening 506, and the upper large winning opening is the one in which the lower large winning opening 506 wins. It is more advantageous for the player than winning 505.

  If the gaming ball is on the second opening / closing plate 433 immediately before switching from the closed state to the open state A or B, the gaming ball falls downward in the process of switching to the open state A or B, It becomes possible to win a prize on the lower side big prize winning opening 506. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming ball that has reached the variable winning unit 501 during the standby period (period in the closed state) between the previous round game and the next round game is It will be possible to win a prize.

  By the way, in the case of the open state A in the previous round game and the open state B in the next round game, it is in the closed state as in the case of the second modification (FIG. 40) of the fourth embodiment. It is possible to shift from the open state A to the open state B without returning. As a result, it is possible to shift from the previous round to the next round without interruption or immediately start the next round after the end of the previous round, eliminating the substantial waiting period or making it extremely short. be able to.

  In this modification, since the upper variable winning device 502 and the lower variable winning device 503 are treated as separate variable winning devices, for example, the round in the mode of the opened state B (the upper big winning opening 505 is opened). When a game is played, in the round game, the winning number of gaming balls to the upper large winning opening 505 becomes a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 10), or the duration of the open state B is a predetermined upper limit It ends based on becoming a period (for example, 30 sec). Similarly, also when a round game is performed in the open state A (a state in which the lower large winning opening 506 is open), the number of winning game balls to the upper large winning opening 505 is the predetermined upper limit number and The round game ends on the basis that the duration of the open state B becomes the predetermined upper limit period.

  In the present modification, the notification effect (FIG. 32) based on the winning of the game ball to the lower big winning opening 506 may or may not be performed.

<Modified Example 1 of Fifth Embodiment>
This modification is different from the fifth embodiment in that it does not have an open state A (a state in which the lower large winning opening 506 is open) shown in FIG. 47 (a). In this modification, the open state is only the open state B (the state in which the upper large winning opening 505 is open), and switching between the closed state (FIG. 46 (b)) and the open state B is performed. Is configured to be That is, as in the case of the first modification (FIG. 34) of the third embodiment, the winning opportunities for the game ball to the lower big winning opening 506 are limited only when switching to the open state B. As a result, when the number of game balls on the second opening and closing plate 433 is larger at the time of the switching, it is possible to emphasize the game property which is more advantageous to the player.

Sixth Embodiment
The present embodiment is based on the third embodiment described above and is devised by devising the configuration of the ball receiver in the closed state. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. (A) and (b) of FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the opening and closing member 631 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 49 is a side view. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted. However, in the present embodiment, the notification effect is not executed even if the game ball is won in the second winning opening 404, and the number of paid out game balls is also won in the first winning opening 403. It is the same number as the case. That is, the degree of advantage for the player is the same at the time of winning on the first winning opening 403 and at the time of winning on the second winning opening 404.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the opening / closing member 631 of the present embodiment is provided with a long plate-like movable plate 651. Similar to the first opening and closing plate 432 and the second opening and closing plate 433, the movable plate 651 is disposed with the longitudinal direction of the game machine as the longitudinal direction, and the first opening and closing plate 432 and the second opening and closing plate 433 in the rotation direction of the opening and closing member 631. Between the A cylindrical shaft (not shown) extending in the longitudinal direction of the movable plate 651 is provided on one long side 652 of the movable plate 651, and the shaft is provided on the upper surface 433 b of the second opening / closing plate 433. The bearing portion 653 is rotatably connected. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the movable plate 651 can rotate between the first opening and closing plate 432 and the second opening and closing plate 433 about a rotation axis extending in the same direction as the rotation axis of the opening and closing member 431. The configuration is as follows. As a result, the movable plate 651 overlaps with the front surface portion 432b of the first opening and closing plate 432 from the front (FIG. 48A) and overlaps with the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 from above ( It is possible to switch to FIG. 48 (b). The movable plate 651 has a size capable of covering substantially the entire top surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 as shown in FIG. 48 (b). In the present embodiment, a drive source such as a solenoid for driving the movable plate 651 is not provided.

  In the present embodiment, the closed state A shown in FIG. 48 (a) and the closed state B shown in FIG. 48 (b) are shown as the closed state in which the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 are closed. Have. In these closed states A and B, it is different whether or not the movable plate 651 overlaps the second opening and closing plate 433 from above, specifically, the movable plate 651 does not overlap the second opening and closing plate 433 The case is in the closed state A, and the overlapping case is in the closed state B.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, in the closed state A, the movable plate 651 is in the upright state, so that the first surface portion 654 located on the second opening and closing plate 433 side of the movable plate 651 is exposed forward. The upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 is exposed upward. In this case, the first surface 654 of the movable plate 651 is located flush with the front surface 411a of the base body 411 (the front surface of the game board 24. See FIG. 24B) or on the back side of the game machine than the front surface 411a. The game ball can pass in front of the first surface portion 654.

  Therefore, in the above case, the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion in the first mode. The upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 has a smooth flat shape, and when the game ball moves on the upper surface portion 433b, it is difficult for a hook or the like to occur. In addition, the first surface portion 654 of the movable plate 651 also has a smooth flat shape, which also prevents the game ball from being caught and the like.

  An engagement portion 656 is provided on the surface 655 on the rotation tip side of the movable plate 651 so as to protrude from the surface 655 in the rotation radius direction of the movable plate 651. The engaging portion 656 engages with the engaged portion 657 (see FIG. 49) provided on the base body 411 side of the variable winning device 401 when the movable plate 651 is in the standing posture. Thus, the movable plate 651 can be held in the standing posture.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the closed state B, the movable plate 651 is inclined toward the second opening and closing plate 433 so that the front surface portion 432b of the first opening and closing plate 432 is exposed forward, and In the second opening / closing plate 433, the second surface portion 658 located on the first opening / closing plate 432 side is exposed upward. In this case, the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 functions as a ball receiving portion in a second mode. The second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 is provided with a plurality of convex streaks 660 extending in a direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction of the movable plate 651, and these convex streaks 660 are convex according to another embodiment. It functions as a decelerating means as with the strip portion 215. That is, when the gaming ball is placed on the second surface portion 658, the movement of the gaming ball in the direction toward the out ports 141 and 171 is inhibited by the ridges 660, and the gaming ball is decelerated.

  A plurality of groove portions 661 are provided on the front surface portion 432 b of the first opening and closing plate 432 so as to correspond to the convex streaks 660. When the opening and closing member 631 is in the closed state A, the grooved portions 661 can be accommodated in the grooves 661.

  Next, an operation aspect of the opening and closing member 631 in the normal gaming state and the opening and closing execution mode will be described. Although illustration is omitted, also in the present embodiment, the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 (see FIG. 5) are provided on the game board 24, and the game balls flowing down the game area PE are variable winning It is integrated into the arrangement area of the device 401.

  First, the case of the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (a) and 49. In the normal gaming state, the state of the opening and closing member 631 is maintained in the closed state in which the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 are closed. In this case, the movable plate 651 is held in the upright posture by the engagement between the engaging portion 656 and the engaged portion 657, and the open / close member 631 is in the closed state A. In the closed state A, the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening and closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion, so the gaming balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 in the gaming area PE are the second opening and closing plate 433. Drops onto the upper surface portion 483b of the lower layer, and rolls on the upper surface portion 483b. As described above, since the upper surface portion 483b is smooth and flat, the gaming ball moves smoothly on the upper surface portion 483b and is moved to the out ports 141 and 171 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening and closing member 431. It is induced quickly.

  Next, the case where the open / close execution mode is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view for explaining an operation mode of the opening and closing member 631 in the opening and closing execution mode. Here, for convenience, it is assumed that the open number of the variable winning device 401 in one round game is one.

  In the first round of the round game, first, the open / close member 631 is pivoted forward from the closed state A described above, and the first winning opening 403 is opened (FIGS. 50 (a) and (b)). . At this time, when the first opening and closing plate 432 presses the movable plate 651 from behind, the engagement of the engaging portion 656 with the engaged portion 657 is released, and the movable plate 651 rotates forward with the opening and closing member 631. Thereafter, when the first opening and closing plate 432 is pivoted to the open position, the movable plate 651 is pivoted downward by its own weight. As a result, the movable plate 651 is separated from the first opening and closing plate 432 and is in contact with the second opening and closing plate 433.

  Thereafter, when the closing condition of the round game (when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches a predetermined upper limit number or the opening period reaches a predetermined upper limit period) is satisfied, the opening / closing member 631 is in the above case. And is returned to the closed state (FIG. 50 (c)). At this time, the movable plate 651 pivots together with the opening and closing member 631 so as to lean on the second opening and closing plate 433. As a result, at the time of return to the closed state, the movable plate 651 overlaps the second opening and closing plate 433 from above, and the closed state of the opening and closing member 631 is switched to the closed state B.

  In the closed state B, since the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 functions as a ball receiving portion, the gaming balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 in the game area PE are the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651. It falls and rolls on the second surface portion 658. As described above, since the second surface portion 658 is provided with the ridge portion 660 as a decelerating means, the movement velocity of the game ball moving on the second surface portion 658 is reduced by the ridge portion 660. Ru. Therefore, the time for the game ball to reach the out ports 141 and 171 is longer than in the closed state A, and the period of stay on the opening and closing member 631 is prolonged.

  Then, when the round game of the second round is started, the open / close member 631 is again rotated forward, and the closed state is switched to the open state (FIG. 50 (d)). Along with this, the game ball on the movable plate 651 falls downward and wins the second winning opening 404. As described above, in the standby period immediately before the second round, the closed state B is established, and the stay period of the game ball on the opening / closing member 631 (the movable plate 651) is extended. For this reason, the probability that the opening and closing member 631 is switched to the open state more quickly than the game ball on the ball receiving portion reaches the out ports 141 and 171 increases, and the winning probability of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 increases. That is, the closed state B is a more advantageous mode for the player than the closed state A.

  Thereafter, when the end condition of the round game is satisfied, the open / close member 631 is again rotated in the reverse direction to return to the closed state (FIG. 50 (e)). Also in this case, the closed state B is obtained as in the case of the end of the first round, and the stay period of the gaming ball on the opening / closing member 631 (the movable plate 651) is prolonged. Thereafter, the same processing is repeated until the end of the 14th round.

  When the round game of the 15th round is started, the opening and closing member 631 is pivoted rearward from the closed state B (FIG. 50 (e)) (FIG. 50 (f)). Thereby, the first winning opening portion 403 is closed by the second opening and closing plate 433 and the second winning opening portion 404 is opened. In this case, the game balls on the second surface 658 of the movable plate 651 at the start of the backward rotation win the first winning opening 403. Further, as the open / close member 631 rotates backward, the movable plate 651 falls backward and rotates to the first open / close plate 432 side. Thereafter, when the end condition of the round game is satisfied, the open / close member 631 is rotated forward from the state of FIG. 50 (f), and is returned to the closed state (FIG. 50 (g)). In this case, the movable plate 651 rises along with the first opening and closing plate 432 in such a manner as to lean on the first opening and closing plate 432, whereby the switching to the closed state A is performed.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  It is possible to switch between the case where the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening / closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion (closed state A) and the case where the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 functions as a ball receiving portion (closed state B) The easiness of movement of the gaming ball in the ball receiving portion in a predetermined direction (direction toward the out port 141, 171) can be changed.

  In the open / close execution mode, on enhancing the winning efficiency of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 402 (reducing the number of out balls), the moving speed of the gaming ball passing through the ball receiving portion is reduced, and the gaming ball is on the ball receiving portion. It is desirable to extend the period of stay. However, if the ball receiving portion is structured to greatly decelerate the game ball, the action is exhibited even in the normal gaming state, so the flow of gaming balls on the ball receiving portion stagnates in the normal gaming state, and the ball receiving portion And there is a risk of ball clogging in the surrounding area. For this reason, it is necessary to suppress the degree of deceleration to a low level, or in the normal gaming state, it is necessary to configure the game ball not to pass above the ball receiving portion, which restricts the design of the gaming machine.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, by switching between the closed state A and the closed state B, the ease of movement of the gaming ball on the ball receiving portion can be changed, and the above restriction can be alleviated. Thereby, in the open / close execution mode, the flow of gaming balls on the ball receiving unit can be stagnated, while in the normal gaming state, the flow of gaming balls on the ball receiving unit can be smoothed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the winning efficiency of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 402 in the opening / closing execution mode while avoiding the influence on the normal gaming state.

  The movable plate 651 is disposed between the first opening and closing plate 432 and the second opening and closing plate 433 so as to be rotatable, and the aspect of the ball receiving portion is mechanically interlocked with switching of the rotation direction of the opening and closing member 631. It was configured to switch. In this case, switching control of the opening / closing member 631 (opening / closing control of the variable winning device 401) and switching control of the ball receiving portion can be performed collectively. As a result, the control process can be simplified as compared to the case where the switching control is performed separately, and the processing load on the main control device 81 can be reduced. Note that "mechanical interlocking" means interlocking without the intervention of an electric actuator.

  A forward rotation and a backward rotation of the opening and closing member 631 are provided as a transition mode from the closing state to the opening state, and the closing state B is entered when the opening and closing member 631 is pivoted forward, and a closing state when pivoted backward. It was set as A. In this case, since the rotational direction of the opening and closing member 631 corresponds to the closed state, it is considered that a player who is interested in which of the closed states A and B is focused on the movement of the opening and closing member 631 It becomes possible to preferably raise the degree of attention to the game. In addition, it is possible to control which of the closed states A and B is to be set by controlling which of the forward rotation and the backward rotation is to be performed in each opening and closing control. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the switching patterns in the closed state from becoming uniform, such as switching between the closed states A and B alternately each time the opening / closing control is performed, and to diversify the state switching patterns. Furthermore, in the final round of the open / close execution mode, by rotating the open / close member 631 backward, the normal gaming state after the end of the open / close execution mode can be started in the state returned to the closed state A. Thereby, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball receiving portion in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that ball clogging or the like is induced.

  In the above embodiment, only the 15th round (final round) is in the closed state A, and all other rounds are in the closed state B. Even in the rounds other than the 15th round, the closed state A is adopted. Good. In this case, in order to diversify the rounds in the closed state B (or closed state A), a plurality of jackpot results are provided as a distribution result of the jackpot type, and the rounds in which the closed state B (or closed state A) is reached It is good to make it the composition which changes. For example, in the case of the jackpot result A, the closed state B is obtained in each of the first to fourth rounds (only the fifteenth round is the open state A), and in the case of the jackpot result B, the first to tenth rounds Each time the eye is closed B (the remaining rounds are closed A), and in the case of the jackpot result C, it can be closed A in all rounds. Such a configuration makes it difficult to grasp in advance the round in which the closing state A is to be reached (the round in which the opening and closing member 631 is pivoted backward), and can further increase interest in the movement of the opening and closing member 631. It is also effective in suppressing.

  Moreover, the configuration of the closed state in the open / close execution mode is made different depending on whether the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, thereby suggesting the lottery mode It may be In this case, the closed state in the predetermined round in the open / close execution mode may be different between the case where the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode and the case where the low probability mode is selected. This not only enjoys whether or not to be in the closed state B where winning on the special winning opening 402 is likely to occur, but also predicts the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode based on which closed state. You can grant fun. In this case, in the game turn and opening and closing execution mode which results in the jackpot, notification is not performed on the display screen G and the speaker of the symbol display device 41 to indicate or indicate the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends. Good. In addition, when performing alerting, it is good not to do until the above-mentioned predetermined round in opening / closing execution mode ends including the game turn which becomes a big hit result, and to carry out after the start of the round performed next to the round concerned. Also, instead of the lottery mode, a configuration may be adopted that suggests a support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode.

<Modified Example 1 of Sixth Embodiment>
The present modification is different from the sixth embodiment in the configuration of the opening and closing member, and specifically, is different in that it is based on the first embodiment. The present modification will be described with reference to FIGS. (A) of FIG. 51 is a front view of the variable winning prize apparatus 201 according to the present modification and its peripheral configuration, (b) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member 731, and FIGS. 52 and 53 are AA of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning prize apparatus 401 corresponded to a linear cross section. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the opening / closing member 731 according to the present modification includes a plate-like shutter portion 732 so as to cover the large winning opening 202 (see FIG. 7B). The upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 is smooth and flat like the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 according to the sixth embodiment. The opening / closing member 731 is configured to be able to slide in the front-rear direction, and retracts from the front surface portion 211a of the base body 211 (the front surface of the game board 24) to the front of the gaming machine And can be displaced to the retracted position where the protrusion to the front of the gaming machine is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 51B, the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 is provided with a support portion 734 so as to stand upward. The support portion 734 is disposed closer to the rear end portion 732 b of the shutter portion 732, and the front surface portion 734 a is provided with a plurality of extending portions 735 extending forward. The length dimensions of the extension portions 735 in the front-rear direction are equal, and in each case, the front end 735 a is located rearward of the front end 732 c of the shutter portion 732. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the extension portions 735 form vertically long rectangular shapes in a front view from the front of the gaming machine, and are arranged at equal intervals. On the other hand, a plurality of slit portions 737 are formed in the base body 211 so as to correspond to the extension portions 735. Each slit portion 737 penetrates the base body 211 in the thickness direction, and each extension portion 735 can be inserted into each slit portion 737 from the rear of the base body 211.

  In this modification, the closed state A shown in FIG. 52 (a) and the closed state B shown in FIG. 52 (b) are provided as the closed state in which the big winning opening 202 is closed. In these closed states A and B, the amount of sliding (moving distance) of the opening / closing member 731 forward from the retracted position is different. Specifically, the amount of sliding in the closed state B is larger than that in the closed state A. Is getting bigger.

  In the closed state A shown in FIG. 52 (a), the front end 735a of each extension 735 is flush with the front surface 211a of the base body 211 (the front surface of the game board 24) or slightly behind the front surface 211a. It is located on the side. For this reason, in the closed state A, the flow of gaming balls moving on the upper surface portion 732 a of the shutter portion 732 is not blocked or is less likely to be blocked by the extension portion 735. Further, as described above, since the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 is smooth and flat, the gaming ball moves smoothly on the upper surface portion 732a, and the game balls are arranged out on the left and right sides of the opening / closing member 731. It is rapidly induced to the mouth 141,171.

  On the other hand, in the closed state B shown in FIG. 52 (b), the front end 735a of each extension 735 protrudes forward relative to the front surface 211a of the base body 211 (the front surface of the game board 24). Therefore, in the closed state B, each extending portion 735 functions as a blocking portion or a blocking portion that blocks the flow of gaming balls moving on the upper surface portion 732 a of the shutter portion 732, and the gaming balls are Be slowed down. Therefore, the time for the game ball to reach the out ports 141 and 171 is longer than in the closed state A, and the period of stay on the opening and closing member 731 is extended.

  Also in this modified example, in the normal gaming state, the opening / closing member 731 is maintained in the closed state A, and the gaming balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 are quickly induced to the out ports 141, 171. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode, the closed state B is established in each of the first to fourteenth round standby periods, and the stay period of the gaming ball on the open / close member 731 is prolonged. Then, at the start of the next round, the gaming ball existing on the opening and closing member 731 falls downward as the opening and closing member 731 retracts to the retracted position, as shown in FIG. Win a prize. Thereafter, when the round game of the 15th round is finished, the closed state of the opening and closing member 731 is switched to the closed state A.

  As described above, also in the present modification, it is possible to change the ease of movement of the gaming ball in the ball receiving portion in the predetermined direction (the direction toward the out port 141, 171). Thereby, in the open / close execution mode, the flow of gaming balls on the ball receiving unit can be stagnated, while in the normal gaming state, the flow of gaming balls on the ball receiving unit can be smoothed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the winning efficiency of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 202 in the open / close execution mode while avoiding the influence on the normal gaming state.

  In the above configuration, switching between the open states A and B is performed by causing the extension portion 735 to appear and retract. However, in the closed state A, the protrusion amount is smaller than that in the open state B. The front end portion 735a of the portion 735 may project forward from the base body 211.

  Further, in the above configuration, only the 15th round (final round) is in the closed state A, and all other rounds are in the closed state B. However, the closed state A may be made in the rounds other than the 15th round. Also, the round to be in the closed state B (or the closed state A) is made different between when the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode and when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. May be suggested.

Seventh Embodiment
The present embodiment is based on the above third embodiment, and differs from the above embodiments in that a third operation port 803 is provided in place of the second winning opening 404. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 (a) is a front view of a winning unit 801 according to the present embodiment and the peripheral configuration thereof, and FIG. 54 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. In this figure, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a winning unit 801 in which the variable winning device 802 and the third operation port 803 are integrated. The winning unit 801 includes a base body 811 fitted in the game board 24, and a variable winning device 802 is disposed above the base body 811. The variable winning device 802 has a first winning opening 403, an opening and closing member 431 for opening and closing the first winning opening 403, and a back structure for guiding and detecting a game ball that has won the first winning opening 403 It consists of a single ball passage 405 and a winning sensor 403a for the first big winning opening.

  A third operation port 803 is disposed below the base body 811 (below the variable winning device 802). The third operation opening 803 is opened forward, and its size is such that a plurality of gaming balls can pass simultaneously. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), a ball passage 821 is provided on the back side of the base body 811 so as to communicate with the third operation port 803. The ball passage 821 extends rearward, and the gaming ball having won the third operation opening 803 flows into the second ball passage 421 and is guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 821a. In the middle position, a third operation opening winning sensor 803a is disposed which detects a game ball winning in the third operation opening 803. The third operation port winning combination sensor 803a is electrically connected to the main control unit 81, and the main control unit 81 generates a third operation opening 803 based on the detection information output from the third actuation opening combination winning sensor 803a. Determine the presence or absence of a prize.

  When a winning to the third operation port 803 is specified by the main control unit 81, each numerical information (big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and fluctuation type counter) at the timing when the win is specified. CS) is acquired and stored as hold information in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit provided in the hold ball storage area 114 b of the RAM 114. That is, like the lower operation port 34, the third operation port 803 corresponds to the pattern displayed on the second result display unit BS so as to be changed / stopped. In the following, the symbols that are variably displayed on the second result display unit BS in response to the winning of the lower actuation opening 34 or the third actuation opening 803 are triggered by the winning of the upper actuation opening 33. The former may be referred to as a second special view, and the latter may be referred to as a first special view, in order to distinguish them from the patterns variably displayed in the AS.

  Also, when a winning on the third operation port 803 is specified, a winning ball command is output to the payout control device 97, and, for example, two winning balls as in the case where a winning on the lower operating port 34 occurs. Disbursement is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), on the left and right sides of the third operation opening 803 in the lower part of the base body 81, an out port 806 for discharging a part of the gaming balls flowing into the passage portion 408 is provided. There is. The out port 806 opens forward, and its size is such that one game ball can pass through.

  Next, distribution of jackpot types according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. (A) of FIG. 55 is an explanatory view for explaining the distribution table for the upper operation port 33 (the first special view side), and (b) is for the lower operation port 34 or the third operation port 803 (second It is an explanatory view for explaining a distribution table of FIG.

  When a big hit result is obtained based on the winning of the upper operation port 33, the type of the big hit result is distributed using the first distribution table shown in FIG. 55 (a). In the first distribution table, 5R probability variation jackpot results and 5R normal jackpot results are set as types of jackpot results. Each of these means that the number of rounds to be executed is five.

  When a big hit result is obtained based on the winning of the lower operation port 34 or the third operation port 803, the type of the big hit result is distributed using the second distribution table shown in FIG. 55 (b). In the second distribution table, 15R probability variation jackpot results and 15R normal jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results. Each of these means that the number of rounds to be executed is 15.

  As described above, rather than the big hit result based on the winning on the upper actuation port 33, the one that produces the big hit based on the winning on the lower actuation port 34 or the third actuation port 803 is executed in the open / close execution mode The number of rounds played is likely to be large, and more prize balls are expected. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the second special view side than to receive the lottery on the first special view side.

  Incidentally, in the open / close execution mode, the drawing mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode, regardless of which of the first special drawing and the second special drawing. Further, while the open / close execution mode is being executed, the variable display of the pattern is not executed on any of the first special view and the second special view (see step S301 in FIG. 14).

  Here, data setting processing in the present embodiment will be described. This process is performed in step S304 of the game control process (FIG. 14), and is executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81.

  In the data setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the second start reserve storage number RbN reserved and stored in the second result display area reserve area Rb is “0”. If the second start pending storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit AS is executed, and if the second start pending storage number RbN is not "0," the second result display Execute data setting processing for the part BS.

  In the data setting process for the first result display unit AS, the first start reserve storage number RaN for the first result display unit reserve area Ra is decremented by 1 and the first area for the first result display unit reserve area Ra is Move the stored data to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the first result display area reserve area Ra toward the lower area side is executed.

  In addition, also in the data setting process for the second result display unit BS, the decrement of the second start reservation storage number RbN of the second result display unit reserved area Rb is decremented by 1 and the second result display unit reserved area Rb The transfer processing of the data stored in the first area to the execution area AE is performed, and the shift processing of the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the second result display area reserve area Rb is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display unit reserved area Ra and the second result display unit reserved area Rb (FIG. 11), the second result display is performed. Lottery processing based on the suspension information stored in the club storage area Rb (the suspension information stored corresponding to the lower operation opening 34 or the third operation opening 803), that is, the second special view lottery processing Is executed with priority.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state and the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. Note that in any of the normal gaming state and the open / close execution mode, the flow until the gaming balls having flowed down the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 are collected into the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301 is referred to FIG. This is the same as the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus the description is omitted.

  In the normal gaming state, the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 802 is not executed, and the opening and closing member 431 is maintained at the closing position where the first winning opening portion 403 is closed (FIGS. 54A and 54B). In this case, the gaming ball can not pass in front of the second opening and closing plate 433 of the opening and closing member 431, and can not flow into the passage portion 408 below the second opening and closing plate 433. For this reason, winning of the third operation port 803 does not occur.

  By the way, when it becomes an open result by the electronic combination open lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 35 (Figure 4), the electric part 34a provided corresponding to the lower operation opening 34 becomes an open state The game ball can be won in the lower operation opening 34. The same applies to the support mode in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, thereby securing the opportunity to receive the lottery processing of the second special view side in the normal gaming state. As described above, the probability of winning in the lower operation opening 34 is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, when the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode, switching control (open / close control) for changing the variable winning device 802 from the closed state to the open state and then from the open state to the closed state is performed at least once. In switching control, when the opening and closing member 431 is rotated forward from the closing position, the first winning opening 403 is switched from the closing state to the opening state, and it is possible to win the game ball to the first winning opening 403 Become. At this time, when the gaming ball is placed on the second opening and closing plate 433 just before the switching, the gaming ball falls downward from the second opening and closing plate 433 as the opening and closing member 431 rotates forward. As a result, the gaming ball flows into the passage portion 408, and it is possible to win the third operation port 803.

  Incidentally, since the out ports 806 are provided on the left and right sides of the third operation port 803, it is possible to prevent part of the game balls having flowed in the passage portion 408 from winning in the third operation port 803. As a result, the game ball having flowed into the passage portion 408 is prevented from always winning in the third operation opening 803, and the player's interest in the whereabouts of the game ball dropped from the second opening and closing plate 433 can be maintained. Become. The out ports 806 do not necessarily have to be provided on both sides of the third operation port 803, and may be provided on only one side.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The third operation port 803 corresponding to the second special view advantageous to the player is provided, and in the opening / closing execution mode, winning of the third operation port 803 can occur. In this case, the player not only obtains a large number of prize balls based on the winning on the variable winning device 802 by shifting the gaming state to the open / close execution mode, but also the second special view side lottery in the subsequent game It is possible to acquire the right to receive (a draw on the advantageous side). On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the configuration in which the winning of the third operation port 803 is not generated makes it possible to suppress that the game is performed under conditions that are excessively advantageous for the player. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to add value to the open / close execution mode and improve the attractiveness of the open / close execution mode while avoiding the influence on the normal gaming state.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, it is difficult for a winning on the second special view-side operation port to occur in the normal gaming state (except when the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, such as in the middle of a hour or in a definite change). The present invention is also effective for gaming machines configured. That is, in such a gaming machine, the open / close execution mode is started in a state in which the first special view has a hold and the second special view has no hold, and the open / close execution mode may end in that state. obtain. In this case, even if the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, the first special view side lottery for odds (a draw on the unfavorable side) is performed first in the game after the end of the open / close execution mode This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, even if the open / close execution mode is started in a state in which there is a hold on the first special view side and no hold on the second special view side, the open / close execution mode is being executed. As a result of winning on the third operation port 803, it is possible to replenish the hold on the second special view side. As a result, the second special drawing side lottery processing can be easily performed first, and the ease of play can be improved.

  The third operation port 803 is disposed downstream of the variable winning device 802. For example, when the third operation port 803 is positioned upstream of the variable winning device 802, the game ball does not reach the variable winning device 802 due to the winning of the third operation port 803, and as a result, the variable winning device There is a risk that the prize for 802 will be blocked. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the third operation port 803 is located on the downstream side of the variable winning device 802, it is suppressed that the winning of the variable operation device 802 is inhibited by the winning of the third operation port 803. Be done. As a result, it is possible to cause a winning to the third operation port 803 in the open / close execution mode while suppressing that the winning condition of the gaming ball to the variable winning device 802 is affected.

  The lower operating port 34 is disposed upstream of the variable winning device 802 (the second opening and closing plate 433). According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that even the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 34 is restricted in accordance with the restriction of the flow of the game ball by the second opening and closing plate 433. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the third operation port 803 not to have a winning, while suppressing the influence of the game ball on the lower operating port 34 from being affected.

  In the above embodiment, the game ball can not be won in the third operation port 803 in the normal game state, but it may be possible to win in a range which is more difficult to win than in the open / close execution mode. . As such a configuration, for example, when the distance D1 between the front end portion 433a of the second opening and closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the gaming ball, the gaming ball passes the vicinity of the window panel 62, and the third operation opening A configuration in which winning in 803 is possible, or a configuration in which part of the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area PE can be directly led out to the passage portion 408 or the third operation opening 803 without passing through the second opening and closing plate 433 It is possible to do.

<Other Embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations may be individually applied to the above embodiments, or some or all of them may be combined and applied to the above embodiments. Moreover, it is also possible to combine arbitrarily all or one part of the various structure shown to said each embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exhibited) of each configuration to be a combination be secured. The following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration including a combination of the embodiments, and some or all of the configurations may be combined and applied.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning apparatus of the type that opens and closes the big winning opening by moving the shutter forward and backward or the opening and closing member moves forward and backward is illustrated. Good. As a side-opening type variable winning apparatus, it protrudes forward from the front of the game board 24 and is provided corresponding to a projecting part having an opening as a ball entering part and corresponding to the ball entering part and intersects the game board 24 A movable blade as a movable body that rotates about an axis in a direction, and the movable blade rotates to change the degree of opening of the opening, and an open state (a game ball can enter the ball entering portion) Or what switches to the closed state (The 2nd state in which the gaming ball can not enter the ball at the ball entry part or is harder to enter than the first state) can be mentioned.

  (2) In the shutter 216 according to the first embodiment and the second opening / closing plate 433 according to the third embodiment, in order to provide guiding means for gaming balls to the out ports 141, 171, However, the invention is not limited to this as long as the guidance function can be achieved. For example, it may be configured to be inclined only in one direction (FIG. 56 (a)), or may be configured to be asymmetrical (FIG. 56 (b)). May be included. In the cases of FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b), the case where the game ball is made to enter in the direction of arrow A with respect to the shutter 216 (for example, when hitting the left) and the case where it is made to enter The time required for the game ball on the shutter 216 to reach the out port 171 is different depending on the case of hitting), and it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage.

  The degree of deceleration may be different between the left and the right by making the number, interval, height, shape, etc. of the ridges 215 as the deceleration means different on the left and right of the shutter 216 and the second opening and closing plate 433.

  (3) Although the shutter 216 in the first embodiment and the second opening and closing plate 433 in the third embodiment have the inclination downward to the out ports 141 and 171, the fourth embodiment Like the second opening and closing plate 433 in the embodiment, it may be flat. The second opening and closing plate 433 in the fourth embodiment, the movable plate 651 and the second opening and closing plate 433 in the sixth embodiment, and the shutter portion 732 in the seventh embodiment are flat. Like the shutter 216 in the first embodiment, it may be configured to have a slope that descends toward the out ports 141 and 171. In this case, it can also be configured as shown in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b).

  (4) In the above embodiments, the out-ports 141 and 171 are configured to open on the variable winning device side, but may be configured to open upward or forward. In particular, in the case of the configuration opening forward, it becomes easy to visually observe how the gaming ball enters the out port and flows backward in the front view from the front of the gaming machine, and the gaming ball is discharged from the gaming area PE It is expected that the player can easily recognize the

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, in the front face portion of the flow path forming portion 131, 161, a guiding passage for guiding the game ball entered in the out ports 141, 171 and the out ports 141, 171 to the back side of the game board 24. Although the overlapping portion is made opaque and the flow of gaming balls entered into the opening of the out port 141, 171 or the out port 141, 171 is made invisible or hard to recognize from the front of the gaming machine, the above portion has transparency. The opening of the out ports 141 and 171 may be visible or easily visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  (6) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the operation openings 33 and 34, and the hold information is stored with the predetermined number (4 pieces) as the upper limit, but the hold information is May not be stored. In this way, the configuration can be simplified. The same applies to the winning on the through gate 35.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information based on the winning on the upper operation opening 33 is stored with the upper limit of four, but may be less than four, or five or more. May be In addition, the upper limit storage number of the suspension information based on each winning on the lower operation opening 34 and the through gate 35 may be less than four, or five or more. Further, the upper limit storage numbers of the suspension information based on winnings on the operation ports 33 and 34 and the through gate 35 may be different.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball is led out to the variable winning device regardless of which of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3 the game ball flows down (regardless of the release of the game ball). However, it may be configured to lead to the variable winning device only when the gaming ball flows down either the left area PE2 or the right area PE3.

  (9) In the third to seventh embodiments, the ridges as the speed reduction means are provided on the opening / closing member (ball receiving portion), but, for example, the front portion of the base body (the front surface of the game board 24), etc. You may provide in another location. In addition, although the game ball is decelerated by producing a level difference by the ridges and the stay period of the game ball on the opening and closing member is extended, a non-linear passage shape (for example, a serpentine passage shape) By doing this, the stay period may be extended.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device is provided with a variable winning device that is opened and closed when the big hit results as the "variable ball entering means", but the "variable ball entering means" is not limited thereto. For example, it may be a variable operation port (electric accessory 34a and lower operation port 34) that is opened and closed based on the result of the electronic combination open lottery. The same applies to the "movable body" and the "ball entering portion" opened and closed by the movable body, and the motorized part 34a and the lower operation port 34 may correspond to each other. By the way, the operation opening opened and closed by the motor-operated part 34a does not necessarily have to be on the "lower" side, and the arrangement location thereof is arbitrary.

  (11) In the second embodiment, even when the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, a shielding means is provided which faces the out ports 141 and 171 and covers and shields the openings of the out ports 141 and 171. Good. Thereby, the out ports 141 and 171 can be made more inconspicuous, and their presence can be further diluted. The shielding means may be provided on the open / close door 305 (more specifically, provided so as to project forward from the front surface portion 305 b of the open / close door 305). In this case, a state in which the shielding means shields the out ports 141 and 171 (a state facing the out ports 141 and 171) and a state in which it is released (out port 141, It is possible to switch between the state where it does not face 171 and the state where it does not face.

  (12) In the second embodiment, the out ports 141 and 171 may be omitted. As a result, it is possible to cause the variable winning device 301 to win all of the gaming balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301.

  (13) In the above third to seventh embodiments, the ball receiving portion (or the ball receiving means) is integrally provided with the opening / closing member (movable body), but these are separated and disposed separately It is good also as composition. In this case, a transmission means such as a link mechanism for transmitting the movement of the movable body to the ball receiving portion is provided, and the ball receiving portion is mechanically interlocked with the movable body to switch between the ball receiving state and the dropping state for dropping the game ball. It is good also as composition. The ball receiving drive means is provided with a ball receiving drive means for driving the ball receiving portion, and the ball receiving portion is switched from the ball receiving state to the falling state according to the movable body switching from the closed state to the open state. It may be configured to control the The control of the ball receiving drive means in the latter case may be performed by the main control unit 81 because the coordination (synchronization) with the control of the movable body is simplified. When the upper variable winning device 502 and the lower variable winning device 503 are provided as in the fifth embodiment, two drive units are provided for the variable winning devices 502 and 503, and one of them is provided. May be used as a drive unit for driving the opening and closing member 431, and the other may be used as a drive unit for driving the ball receiving unit.

  (14) In the third embodiment, the second winning opening 404 is more advantageous to the player than the first winning opening 403, but the first winning opening 403 is a second winning opening. It may be configured to be more advantageous than 404. In addition, the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 may be configured to have no difference in the degree of advantage. In this case, the detection means (sensor) for detecting the winning of the gaming ball to the first winning opening 403 and the detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming ball for the second winning opening 404 are made common, and one detection You may comprise by means. In this case, the detection means may be provided downstream of the junction of the first ball passage 405 and the second ball passage 421 or at the downstream side thereof.

  (15) In the third embodiment, there is a plurality of waiting periods (round interval periods) having different lengths, for example, a long-term mode in which the waiting period between rounds becomes relatively long, and relatively It may be configured to be able to set a short-time mode (shorter than the long-time mode). When the waiting period is set to the short-term mode, the probability that the next round is started (switched to the open state) before the gaming balls on the ball receiving portion reach the out ports 141, 171 as compared to the long-term mode. And the winning probability of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 increases. That is, it is possible to make a difference in the easiness of winning to the second winning opening 404 depending on the length of the waiting period.

  As such a configuration, for example, whether or not a definite variation jackpot, or a jackpot due to a win to any operation opening (a jackpot in FIG. 1 special figure or a second special figure) became a big hit The standby period in the open / close execution mode can be configured to be long or short depending on the gaming state (such as whether or not the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode is in progress) or the like. Specifically, for example, in the case of a large jackpot result, while the standby period of a predetermined round consisting of one or more rounds shifts to the open / close execution mode as a long-term mode, in the case of a definite variation jackpot result A configuration may be considered in which the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the waiting period of the round is a short-term mode. The setting process of the standby period can be performed in step S515 of the special winning opening / closing process (FIG. 16). Also in the fourth to seventh embodiments, a plurality of waiting periods of different lengths may be provided.

  (16) In the third embodiment, a general variable winning device (second variable winning device) having no ball receiving portion (or ball receiving means) and a second ball entering portion separately from the variable winning device 401 ) May be provided. In this case, when the distribution result of the jackpot type (the result of the lottery process based on the winning on the operation ports 33 and 34) is the first result, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the variable winning device 401, When the distribution result is the second result different from the first result, it is preferable to shift to the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the second variable winning prize device. Depending on which variable winning device is opened or closed, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for the player, and the interest is improved. The same applies to the fourth to seventh embodiments.

  (17) In the third embodiment, the opening and closing control (the control of changing the variable winning device from the closed state to the open state and then the closed state) may be performed plural times in one round game. Compared with the case where the opening / closing control is performed only once, the frequency at which the game ball is winning in the second winning opening 404 is increased, which is preferable in expanding the winning opportunity for the second winning opening 404. In this case, in order to secure a temporal allowance for the game ball to reach the second opening and closing plate 433 during the waiting period between the opening and closing control (period in which the variable winning device is closed and waits for the start of the next opening and closing control), The waiting period may be longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball.

  Furthermore, a round game in which the opening and closing control can be performed a plurality of times and a round game in which the opening and closing control can be performed only once may be set. In this case, the winning frequency for the second winning opening 404 can be made different between the former round game and the latter round game, and in particular, as in the third embodiment, the second winning opening 404 Under the configuration that functions as an advantageous winning opening, the former round game can be made more advantageous to the player than the latter round game.

  The upper limit of each open period in the case of performing the open / close control multiple times should be shorter than the upper limit of the open period in the case of performing the open / close control one time (in other words, the open / close control is performed multiple times) In the case where opening for a short time is performed a plurality of times, it is preferable to perform opening for a long time when performing opening / closing control once. With such a configuration, although it is a round game in which opening and closing control can be performed a plurality of times, the winning number of gaming balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches the upper limit number at the first opening, and the second time Occurrence of situations where the opening of the In such a sense, it is sufficient that at least the upper limit of the opening period of the first opening is shorter than the upper limit of the opening period when performing one opening / closing control.

  (18) In the third embodiment, the predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 to perform the notification effect (FIGS. 32B and 32C). The notification effect may be a light emission effect using light emitting means such as an LED or the like, or may be a bonus effect production using a decorative movable body (movable role product) for movable effect. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be visual. For example, it may be audible using sound effects. In addition, another display device may be provided separately from the symbol display device 41, and the notification effect may be displayed on the display screen of the display device. The same applies to the introduction effect of FIG. 32 (a) and the end effect of FIG. 32 (d).

  (19) In the third embodiment, the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode ends is explicitly indicated in the notification effect, but may be suggested.

  (20) In the third embodiment described above, the notification effect of the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode end is performed as the specific notification based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404, but the specific notification The form of is not limited to this. For example, the support mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode may be suggested or specified, or that a game ball has been awarded to the second winning opening 404 or a predetermined number has been reached. Based on the display of effects such as a background image may be changed, or a special effect image may be displayed.

  In addition, the first notification is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403, and the second notification different from the first notification is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404. It may be When the distance between the two winning opening portions 403 and 404 is short, it may happen that the player can not clearly identify which winning opening portion the game ball has won, but such a disadvantage is caused by the above configuration. Can be suppressed. The notification in this case is not necessarily visual as in the case of (18) above, and may be auditory. Further, the first notification and the second notification may be performed by the same notification means, or may be performed by different notification means.

  (21) In the third embodiment, when the open / close member 431 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion (second open / close plate 433) is the second winning opening 404 However, for example, when the player operates the operation means, such as the effect button, which can be operated by the player, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit is displayed at the second winning opening 404. It may be possible to win a prize. In addition, the ball entering part where the game ball received by the ball receiving part can enter the ball is configured not to pay out the game ball (granting of a bonus) when the game ball enters the ball entering part. It may be

  (22) In the fourth embodiment, two types of open states including the open state A and the open state B are provided. However, three or more types of open states may be provided.

  (23) In the fourth embodiment, the open state B may be more advantageous than the open state A (the first winning opening 403 is more advantageous than the second winning opening 404). An open state on the side where the amount of movement of the member 431 is large can be advantageous.

  (24) In the first and second winning opening 403 and the second winning opening in an intermediate period until the variable winning device 401 switches from the open state A to the open state B in the first and second modifications of the fourth embodiment. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which both of 404 are in the open state, and a period in which the open state A and a period in which the open state B are overlapped. In this case, as compared with the case where the open state A is simply switched to the open state B, it is possible to complicate the winning mode of the gaming ball to the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404. Interestingness is improved. The same applies to the case where the variable winning device 401 switches from the open state B to the open state A. In addition, in a period other than the overlapping period, a state in which both the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 are in the open state may be generated.

  (25) In the fourth embodiment, when switching from the closed state to the open state A is started, predetermined notification is performed in each of the cases where switching from the closed state to the open state B is started, In the predetermined notification, it may be configured not to indicate or indicate which of the open states A and B to be. In this case, it is possible to enjoy a game in which the player is focused on the variable winning device 401 and which one of the open states is predicted.

  (26) In the fourth embodiment, the main control unit 81 controls the variable prize drive unit 419 and the variable prize drive unit 419 drives the opening / closing member 431, but the variable prize drive unit 419 is omitted. The opening and closing member 431 may be rotated by the weight of the gaming ball contacting the opening and closing member 431.

  (27) In the fourth embodiment, the opening / closing member 431 is configured to rotate, but may be configured to move linearly. As such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), a first ball entering portion 853 and a second ball receiving portion 854 which are juxtaposed on the left and right and respectively open upward, and the ball receiving portions 853, 854 is disposed so as to be capable of covering from above, and is provided with an opening / closing member 855 configured to be capable of reciprocating in the direction in which the ball entry portions 853 and 854 are arranged, and opening is performed by switching the movement direction of the opening / closing member 855 A configuration may be considered such as switching the ball entry portion to be in the state.

  (28) In the sixth embodiment, two types of closed states including the closed state A and the closed state B are provided. However, three or more types of closed states may be provided.

  (29) In the sixth embodiment, the movable plate 651 operates in mechanical interlocking with the movement of the opening / closing member 631. However, the movable plate drive means for driving the movable plate 651 is provided, Driving control may be performed separately from the member 631. In this case, the movable plate drive means may be controlled to operate the movable plate 651 in accordance with the start timing of the open / close execution mode and the end timing of the round game (start timing of the waiting period between rounds). The control of the movable plate drive means in this case may be performed by the main control device 81 because the coordination (synchronization) with the control of the opening / closing member 631 is simplified.

  (30) In the seventh embodiment, the second special view is more advantageous than the first special view by providing a difference in the number of rounds executed in the open / close execution mode. Alternatively or additionally, the degree of advantage is different depending on whether the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends shifts to the high frequency support mode, or by providing a difference in the number of games for which the high frequency support mode continues It is good also as composition.

  (31) In the seventh embodiment, although the number of winning balls when the gaming ball has won in the third operation opening 803 is the same as when winning in the lower operation opening 34 occurs, the third operation opening The number of winning balls in the case of winning in 803 is arbitrary, and may be greater than that in the case of winning in the lower operation opening 34. In this case, the special feeling of the third operation port 803 can be enhanced, and more game balls obtainable in the open / close execution mode can be further stacked, leading to improvement of the attractiveness of the open / close execution mode. In addition, the number of winning balls when the gaming ball has won in the third operation opening 803 may be smaller than that when the winning in the lower operation opening 34 occurs, or the game balls may not be paid out. In this case, it is possible to suppress that the total number of winning balls obtainable in the open / close execution mode becomes excessive, and to avoid the player becoming excessively advantageous. In any case, in order to secure superiority of the variable winning device 802, it is preferable to reduce the number of balls (15 in the present embodiment) when the variable winning device 802 is hit. .

  (32) In the first embodiment, the left flow passage forming portion 131 and the right flow passage forming portion 161 may be configured as shown in FIG. FIG. 57 (a) is a front view showing a modification of each of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, and FIG. 57 (b) is a plan view of (a). In addition, since the right side flow passage forming portion 161 is symmetrical to the left side flow passage forming portion 131, the left side flow passage forming portion 131 will be described as an example.

  The left channel forming portion 131 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin as in the first embodiment, and the second vertical wall portion 138 (the side portion of the left channel forming portion 131) is formed. , Out port 141 is open. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the out port 141 has an opening 141a opening in the lateral direction of the gaming machine (rightward, in the direction of arrow C), and a gaming ball entering the opening 141a in the lateral direction After guiding the vehicle to the left), it has a guiding passage portion 141b for guiding to the rear of the gaming machine. The portion for guiding the gaming ball in the lateral direction of the gaming machine in the guiding passage portion 141b has a length of at least one gaming ball.

  In the present modification, the second vertical wall portion 138 is inclined in plan view. Specifically, the front end portion 138a of the second vertical wall portion 138 obliquely intersects the opening direction so that the front end portion 138a is positioned on the opening direction side (right side) of the opening portion 141a relative to the rear end portion 138b. . For this reason, the opening 141 a (opening surface) of the out port 141 is also inclined along the second vertical wall 138.

  For example, if the second vertical wall 138 extends in the longitudinal direction (orthogonal to the front of the game board 24) as in the first embodiment, the front view from the front of the gaming machine Although it is possible to make the opening of the out port 141 inconspicuous, there is a possibility that the opening may be easily seen when looking obliquely. In this respect, according to the present modification, since the opening 141a is inclined, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the opening 141a even when looking obliquely from the front of the gaming machine, and the visibility of the out port 141 is further enhanced. It can be lowered.

  Further, in the present modification, the area 131b (see FIG. 58A) of the front surface portion 131a of the left flow path forming portion 131, which is located at the front of the opening 141a in front view from the front of the game machine In the area 131c located in front of the passage portion 141b, a predetermined decoration is applied by plating, a seal, or the like to color the area. On the other hand, the second inclined portion 136 which is the rolling surface of the game ball does not have such coloring, and the light transmittance of each of the regions 131 b and 131 c is lower than that of the second inclined portion 136. As a result, it is suppressed that the opening 141a and the guide passage portion 141b can be seen through the front surface portion 131a, and the out port 141 is less noticeable.

  Note that, instead of coloring the regions 131 b and 131 c, the regions 131 b and 131 c are formed of an opaque material or a material having a light transmittance lower than that of the second inclined portion 136, thereby making the visibility of the out-port 141 It may be configured to decrease. Alternatively, only one of the regions 131 b and 131 c may be colored, or an opaque material may be used. Even in this case, the out-port 141 can be made less noticeable than in the case where the light transmittance of both the regions 131 b and 131 c is high.

  Furthermore, in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), an overhanging portion 951 is integrally formed at an end of the front surface portion 131 a of the left flow passage forming portion 131 on the shutter 216 side. The overhanging portion 951 is located forward of the opening 141a of the out port 141 in the gaming machine, and overhangs toward the shutter 216 side than the second inclined portion 136 (opening 141a). Similar to the regions 131 b and 131 c, the front surface portion of the overhanging portion 951 is configured to be hardly transparent or opaque because it is colored (decorative) or formed of an opaque material. Therefore, even when viewed obliquely from the front of the gaming machine as well as in a front view, the opening portion 141a is shielded by the overhanging portion 951, making it difficult to visually recognize the opening portion 141a. As a result, the visibility of the out-port 141 is further reduced, and the out-port 141 can be made even less noticeable.

  In the overhanging portion 951, the overhanging portion 951 on the left flow passage forming portion 131 side and the overhanging portion 951 on the right flow passage forming portion 161 side may be continuous in front of the shutter 216. Further, in the above configuration, the overhanging portion 951 is provided after the second vertical wall portion 138 is inclined, but as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the overhanging portion 951 is not inclined. May be provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58C, the second vertical wall portion 138 may be inclined only and the overhanging portion 951 may not be provided.

  The above configuration shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 can be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to the second to seventh embodiments.

  (33) As shown in FIG. 59, the variable winning device 901 for opening and closing the large winning opening 902 by the opening and closing member 911 provided with the ball receiving portion 912 is disposed above the lower operation opening 34 and the electric part 34a. It may be In this case, when the variable winning device 901 is in the open state or in the closed state, the game ball can be made to be able to win or easily win in the lower operation opening 34 from the side when the electric combination 34a is opened. When the accessory 34a is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not be won or is unlikely to win in the lower operation opening 34 (FIG. 57 (a)), while the variable winning device 901 is switched from the closed state to the open state. The game ball may fall from the ball receiving portion 912 so that it is possible to win a prize in the lower operation opening 34 also from above (FIG. 57 (b)). According to the above configuration, it is possible to change not only the ease of occurrence of winning to the lower operation opening 34 but also the winning mode of the gaming ball to the lower operation opening 34 depending on the state of the variable winning device 901. Thereby, the diversity of the game is enhanced and the interest is improved.

  (34) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device The present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as pachinko machines, pachinko machines equipped with other features, arranged ball machines, and ball balls, which become jackpots when rights enter and enter the ball.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is awarded to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  Furthermore, a pachinko machine and slot machine having a loading device and starting rotation of the reel by operating the start lever after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

  Note that the invention described in each of the following features may be described, for example, “in game machines such as pachinko machines, game balls are provided based on the ball entry means provided in the game area or the ball entry into the ball entry unit. With regard to the background art of providing benefits such as payout of money (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175), "Here, in the gaming machine, it is desirable to devise ways to increase the attention to the game. The problem is solved with the problem to be solved by the invention.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
The first state (opened state) provided in the game area and the gaming ball can enter or easily enter the ball and the second state (closed state) in which the gaming ball can not enter or is less likely to enter than the first state Variable entering means (variable winning devices 201, 301, 401, 502, 802) which can be switched to
Variable ball entering control means (main control to execute variable ball entering control to change the ball entering means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on a predetermined specific trigger) A function of executing the special winning opening / closing process by the device 81),
Bonus giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a bonus to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means;
Among the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area, the ball entering the other ball entry portion (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34, general winning openings 31a to 31d) upstream of the variable ball entering means Lead-out means (left channel forming portion) capable of leading all or substantially all of the game balls to a predetermined area downstream of the other ball entry portion regardless of the launch force of the game balls in the launch means A second inclined portion 136 of 131, a second inclined portion 166 of the right channel forming portion 161, and a guiding structure for gaming balls in the areas PE4a to PE4c);
A discharge unit (out port 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
Equipped with
When the variable ball entering means is in the first state, the game ball led to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entering means, and the variable ball entering means is in the second state. A game machine characterized in that a game ball derived to the predetermined area is capable of entering the discharge unit.

  In the case where variable ball entry control is performed, it is desirable for the player that it is possible to achieve efficient ball entry into the variable ball entry means and suppress wasteful consumption of game balls. In this respect, in the above configuration, among the game balls flowing down the game area, all or substantially all of the game balls that did not enter the other ball entry section upstream of the variable ball entry means, the other ball entry If the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball led out to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is in the first state. The structure is In this case, if the player sees the flow of gaming balls collected in the predetermined area, it is likely that the game ball can be efficiently entered into the variable entering means when the variable entering means is switched to the first state. It will be possible to give an impression.

  Moreover, regardless of the launch force of the gaming ball in the launching means, the above-described derivation to the predetermined area is performed, so that the flow of gaming balls gathered in the predetermined area can be made into a special gaming state. It can be generated on a daily basis as well. That is, by the player constantly watching the above-mentioned flow, the awareness that the game ball can be efficiently entered into the variable ball entry means is promoted, and it is possible to enhance the pleasure of generating the variable ball entry control.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the gaming ball led to the predetermined area is configured to be able to enter the discharge part. In this case, in the normal gaming state where variable entering control is not performed, the gaming balls collected in the predetermined area can be released outside the gaming area, and the progress of the game or the variable entering means by the gaming ball of the predetermined area It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the switching operation to the first state is hindered.

Feature A2. It has a game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed,
The other ball entering portion is located on the upstream side of the variable ball entering means, and all the ball entering portions configured to guide the ball entering the ball to the back side of the game board ( It is the upper operating opening 33, the lower operating opening 34, and the general winning opening 31a to 31d). The gaming machine according to the feature A1, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, all or substantially all of the launched game balls can be derived to a predetermined area except when the game balls enter the ball entering portion other than the variable ball entering means, and the variable ball entering means It is possible to preferably realize a configuration capable of causing the game ball to enter efficiently.

Feature A3. The game area is provided so that game balls can pass on both the left and right sides in a top view and a front view, and a symbol display means (symbol display device 41) is provided, in which symbols are variably displayed.
The derivation means is
Left side deriving means (second inclined portion 136 of left side channel forming portion 131) capable of leading out to the predetermined area the gaming ball flowing down the left side out of the left and right sides;
Right-side deriving means (a second inclined portion 166 of the right-side flow path forming portion 161) capable of leading out to the predetermined area the gaming ball flowing down the right side out of the left and right sides;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the left side lead-out means and the right side lead-out means are disposed so as to sandwich the predetermined area.

  According to the above configuration, when the gaming ball is fired to flow down the left area, the gaming ball can be led out to the predetermined area by the left derivation means, and the gaming ball is fired to flow down the right area When it is determined, the gaming ball can be derived to the predetermined area by the right deriving means. That is, it is possible to lead to a predetermined area regardless of which area the game ball is flowing down, and it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the game ball is led out to the predetermined area regardless of the release of the game ball. Furthermore, since the predetermined area is located between the left side derivation means and the right side derivation means, the gaming ball can be drawn out to the predetermined area so as to be close to the center in the left-right direction of the gaming area. As a result, the flow of gaming balls gathered in the predetermined area can be constructed in a place that is easily visible to the player, and the effect of the feature A1 can be suitably exhibited.

  In the feature A3, “arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined area” may be reworded as “arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined area”. In addition, it further has a feature that "the left side deriving means and the right side deriving means are configured such that the predetermined area is located at the center of the game area in the horizontal direction below the pattern display means". It is also good.

  Feature A4. The gaming machine according to the feature A3, wherein the variable ball entry means is disposed between the left side derivation means and the right side derivation means.

  According to the above configuration, even if the player does not actually see the flow of the game ball, the variable ball entering means has an impression that the game ball tends to gather from the positional relationship between the left side deriving means, the right side deriving means and the variable ball entering means. It is possible to be able to appropriately evoke the game intention.

Feature A5. The other ball entry unit includes a predetermined ball entry unit (general winning opening 31a to 31d),
The benefit granting means is configured to be able to grant a bonus to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry portion,
A first lead-out portion (a first inclined portion 133 of the left flow path forming portion 131, a right flow path forming portion, and a first lead-out portion capable of leading the gaming ball above the predetermined ball entry portion or the predetermined ball entry portion in the game area 161 first inclined portion 163),
The second lead-out portion (the left channel can be formed so that the game ball which did not enter the predetermined ball entry portion after being led out by the first lead-out portion can be led out to the predetermined region A game machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, characterized in that it comprises a second inclined portion 136 of the portion 131 and a second inclined portion 166) of the right channel forming portion 161.

  For example, if the configuration is such that the gaming balls enter the balls so efficiently to the variable entering means, the processing load inside the gaming machine for entering the balls may increase, which may cause trouble in the operation of the gaming machine. In this respect, in the present configuration, the first lead-out portion temporarily guides the gaming ball toward the predetermined ball entry portion, and the second lead-out portion guides the gaming ball that has not entered the predetermined ball entry portion to the predetermined area. It is configured. In this case, the game ball's frequency of entering the variable ball entry means can be reduced by increasing the chance that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry part, and the processing load can be reduced. . At that time, because it is configured to grant the benefit based on the ball entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry portion, as a result of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion, as a result of not entering the variable ball entry means Even, the player can obtain the benefit. For this reason, for example, the player's understanding can be obtained more easily than in the case where the game balls are directed to the variable ball entry means by guiding the game balls to the discharge unit, etc. Become.

  Feature A6. The feature A5 is characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is lower when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion than when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, it is suppressed that the player is more advantageous for the player to enter the predetermined ball entry portion than the variable ball entry means, and the fun for causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball It is possible to secure collateral suitably.

  Feature A7. The gaming machine according to the feature A5 or A6, wherein the predetermined ball entry unit has a configuration in which game balls are less likely to enter the ball than the variable entry means in the first state.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive thinning of the gaming ball heading for the variable ball entry means by the predetermined ball entry part, and to appropriately secure an opportunity to enjoy the ball entry into the variable ball entry means Become.

  The feature A7 is characterized in that "the size of the opening of the predetermined ball entering portion is smaller than the size of the opening of the variable ball entering means in the first state" or "the predetermined ball entering It can be rephrased that it is characterized in that the degree of opening of the ball portion is smaller than the degree of opening of the variable entering means in the first state.

  Feature A8. The lead-out means includes a flat portion (upper surface of the second inclined portions 136 and 166) which has a passage shape extending along the lead-out direction of the gaming ball and on which the gaming ball can roll, and the predetermined number The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, which has a configuration that can be derived to an area.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to smoothly derive the gaming ball toward the predetermined area as compared with the case where the game means is constituted by the game nail. In addition, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the gaming balls are not properly derived to the predetermined area by so-called nail bending, and it can be a preferable aspect in securing the fairness of the game.

  Feature A9. When the variable ball entry means is in the first state, it is characterized in that all or substantially all of the game balls led to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A8.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball can be entered into the variable entry means more efficiently. In addition, such ball entry can be realized regardless of the launch force of the game ball, and it is possible to enhance the ball entry efficiency into the variable ball entry means regardless of the player's skill.

Feature A10. When the variable entering means is switched from the second state to the first state, a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) is formed in the gaming area, and the game ball flows into the predetermined receiving area. Is configured to accept
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A9, wherein the predetermined area is included in an area where the predetermined receiving area is formed.

  According to the above configuration, since the predetermined area from which the gaming ball is derived by the deriving means is included in the area in which the predetermined receiving area is formed, when the variable entry means is in the first state and the receiving area is formed, A gaming ball is derived into the receiving area. Therefore, all or substantially all of the game balls led out to the predetermined area can be entered into the variable entry means at the timing when the variable entry means is in the first state, and a more efficient entry action is realized. It becomes possible.

  Characteristics A11. The variable ball entry means includes a shutter (shutter 216) displaceable to a predetermined first position (retracted position) and a second position (projected position) protruding forward of the gaming machine beyond the first position. Features A1 to A10 characterized in that they are in the first state when the shutter is in the first position and in the second state when the shutter is in the second position. The gaming machine described in any one.

  According to the above configuration, when the shutter is at the first position, the game ball led to the predetermined area can pass through the front of the shutter and enter the variable ball entry means, while the shutter is at the second position When the game ball is moved (rolled) on the shutter, it is possible to enter the discharge unit, and it is considered to be a practically preferable mode in distributing the game ball to the variable entering means and the discharge unit. be able to.

Feature A12. When the shutter is at least in the second position, the gaming ball is movable on the shutter toward the side of the shutter.
The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the discharge unit is disposed to the side of the shutter.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to guide the gaming balls to the discharge unit by utilizing the flow of the game balls on the shutter, and it is possible to utilize the shutter as a game ball passage to the discharge unit. Thereby, it is possible to cover the derivation of the game ball to the discharge unit and the switching of the ease of entering the game ball to the variable ball entry means with one member, and it becomes possible to reduce the number of parts. .

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein an interval between the shutter and the discharging unit is less than a diameter of a gaming ball.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from between the shutter and the discharge unit, and it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate lead-out path for guiding the game ball from the shutter to the discharge unit. As a result, the configuration for guiding the gaming ball to the discharge unit becomes simple, and the configuration can be optimized in the gaming machine in which the gaming area is limited.

  Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A12 or A13, wherein the discharge unit is opened to the shutter side.

  According to the above configuration, the momentum of the game ball moving on the shutter can be used to smoothly enter the discharge unit, and stagnation of the flow of the game ball on the shutter can be suppressed. Further, since the discharge unit can be caused to enter the discharge unit without changing the moving direction of the game ball, the game ball passage from the shutter to the discharge unit can be simply configured.

  Feature A15. The shutter is provided with a guide portion (a first shutter inclined portion 217, a second shutter inclined portion 218) capable of guiding the game ball on the shutter to the discharge portion. Any of the features A12 to A14 The game machine described in.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming ball on the shutter can be smoothly guided to the discharge unit, and stagnation of the flow of the gaming ball on the shutter can be suppressed.

  In addition, the present feature “the shutter includes an inclined portion (first shutter inclined portion 217, second shutter inclined portion 218) which is inclined downward toward the discharge portion, and the game ball is discharged to the discharge portion by the inclined portion. It can be paraphrased as "It is characterized by being able to be guided to."

Feature A16. When the shutter is at least in the second position, the game ball can move on the shutter,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A11 to A14, comprising a deceleration means (a convex portion 215) capable of decelerating a game ball moving on the shutter.

  According to the above configuration, the staying period of the game ball on the shutter can be extended compared to the case without the deceleration means. As a result, the probability that the shutter switches from the second position to the first position before the game ball crosses the shutter increases, and the probability that the game ball on the shutter enters the variable ball entry means can be increased. . That is, it is possible to expect ball entry to the variable ball entry means even for gaming balls that have reached the predetermined area under the situation where the shutter is at the second position, and ball entry to the variable ball entry means with higher efficiency is achieved. Ru.

Feature A17. The variable ball entry means is an opening / closing member (opening / closing door 305) that can be displaced to a predetermined first position (retracted position) and a second position (projected position) projecting forward of the gaming machine beyond the first position. Equipped
The opening / closing body can be displaced to the second position by pivoting from the first position to the front of the gaming machine,
The variable ball entry means is configured to be in the second state when the open / close member is in the first position and to be in the first state when the open / close member is in the second position. A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, when the opening and closing body is at the first position, the game ball led to the predetermined area can pass through the front of the opening and closing body and enter the discharge part while the opening and closing body is the second When in the position, the game ball is picked up by the opening and closing body and can enter the variable ball entry means, and it is preferable to be practically preferable in distributing the game ball into the variable ball entry means and the discharge part. it can.

Feature A18. A game ball can flow down in front of the opening and closing body at the first position,
The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the discharge unit is disposed below the opening and closing body.

  According to the above configuration, by the discharge part being positioned below the opening and closing body, it is possible to naturally guide the game ball passing the front of the opening and closing body at the first position to the discharge part. As a result, it becomes possible to guide the game ball, which has reached the predetermined area under the condition that the variable ball entry means is in the second state, to the discharge unit with a relatively simple configuration.

  In the present feature, “the front of the opening and closing body” may be rephrased as “the front side of the opening and closing body in a front view from the front of the gaming machine”. Also in each of the following features, “forward” can be appropriately rephrased as “front side in front view from the front of the gaming machine”.

Features A19. A first discharge unit as the discharge unit;
A second discharge unit (out port 141, 171) which is disposed to the side of the opening and closing body and can discharge the game ball from the game area;
The gaming machine according to feature A18, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the opening and closing body is at the second position, the game ball spilled from the opening and closing body can be discharged from the game area through the second discharging portion, and the game ball is variable in the ball entering means and its peripheral portion It is possible to suppress the stagnation of the flow of

Feature A20. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
The first state (opened state) provided in the game area and the gaming ball can enter or easily enter the ball and the second state (closed state) in which the gaming ball can not enter or is less likely to enter than the first state Variable entering means (variable winning devices 201, 301, 401, 502, 802) which can be switched to
Variable ball entering control means (main control to execute variable ball entering control to change the ball entering means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on a predetermined specific trigger) A function of executing the special winning opening / closing process by the device 81),
Bonus giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a bonus to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means;
Among the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area, the ball entering the other ball entry portion (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34, general winning openings 31a to 31d) upstream of the variable ball entering means Lead-out means (second inclined portion 136 of left channel forming portion 131, right channel forming portion) capable of leading all or substantially all of the gaming balls to a predetermined area downstream of the other ball entry portion The second inclined portion 166 of 161, the guiding structure of the gaming ball in the areas PE4a to PE4c);
A discharge unit (out port 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
Equipped with
When the variable ball entering means is in the first state, the game ball led to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entering means, and the variable ball entering means is in the second state. A game machine characterized in that a game ball derived to the predetermined area is capable of entering the discharge unit.

  In the above configuration, among the game balls flowing down the game area, all or substantially all of the game balls that did not enter the other ball entry section upstream of the variable ball entry means than the other ball entry sections It is configured to be led out to a predetermined area on the downstream side, and on that, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball led to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entry means It has become. In this case, when the variable ball entry means is switched to the first state, the player can efficiently enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means by watching the flow of the game balls gathered in the predetermined area. It will be possible to give such an impression. Furthermore, in the present configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the gaming ball derived to the predetermined area is configured to be able to enter the discharge part. In this case, in the normal gaming state where variable entering control is not performed, the gaming balls collected in the predetermined area can be released outside the gaming area, and the progress of the game or the variable entering means by the gaming ball of the predetermined area It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the switching operation to the first state is hindered.

  Each configuration described in any of the features A1 to A19 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

  Note that for each configuration of the features A1 to A20, any of the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H7. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or to combine the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
The first state (opened state) provided in the game area and the gaming ball can enter or easily enter the ball and the second state (closed state) in which the gaming ball can not enter or is less likely to enter than the first state And variable entering means (variable winning device 301) that can be switched to
Variable ball entering control means (main control to execute variable ball entering control to change the ball entering means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on a predetermined specific trigger) A function of executing the special winning opening / closing process by the device 81),
Bonus giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a bonus to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means;
A first discharge part (out port 141, 171) and a second discharge part (lower out port 321) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
Equipped with
When the variable ball entry means is in the second state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second discharge part than the first discharge part, and the variable ball entry means is in the first state. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball is more easily entered into the first discharge part than the second discharge part.

  In the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second discharge part than the first discharge part, so in the game state in which the variable ball insertion control is not executed The ball is more likely to be expelled through the second expulsion section. In the game, since the period in which the game is not performed is longer than the period in which the variable ball entry control is performed, the player usually sees the game ball being discharged through the second discharge unit. Then, the second discharge part is a discharge port of the game ball, and awareness that the game ball entering the second discharge part becomes a discharge ball (out ball) is promoted. In addition, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball is more likely to be ejected through the other first ejection portion instead of the second ejection portion. Since there is a preconception that the second discharge part is a discharge port, it is suppressed that the player recognizes this as discharge of the game ball even if the game ball is made to enter the first discharge part. For this reason, it is possible to discharge the gaming ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means in the second state while making the discharge less noticeable. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the degree of ball entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means while suppressing a decrease in the game intention.

  Feature B2. When the variable ball entering means is in the first state, the game ball can enter the first discharge part and can not enter the second discharge part. The gaming machine described in B1.

  According to the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball is not discharged through the second discharge unit, so the variable ball entry means is more difficult to give an impression that the game ball is discharged. It becomes possible to adjust the degree of ball entry of the game ball.

  Feature B3. When the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball can enter the second discharge part and can not enter the first discharge part. The gaming machine according to B1 or B2.

  According to the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the presence of the second discharge section can be further emphasized, and the game ball is discharged from the game area by entering the second discharge section. It is possible to further promote the recognition of being This makes it possible to make the gaming ball discharged through the first discharger more inconspicuous, and to enhance the effect of the feature B1.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3, wherein the first discharging unit has lower visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the second discharging unit.

  According to the above configuration, the presence of the first discharge unit is diluted as compared with the second discharge unit, and the player's attention to the first discharge unit is suppressed from increasing. As a result, the discharge of the game ball through the first discharge unit becomes even less noticeable, and the effect of the feature B1 can be enhanced.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, characterized in that the second discharge part opens in the front of the gaming machine, and the first discharging part opens in a direction different from the front of the gaming machine.

  According to the above-described configuration, it can be set as a practically preferable aspect in realizing the configuration of the feature B4. That is, while the visibility of the second discharge unit from the front of the gaming machine is enhanced, the presence of the second discharge unit can be suitably appealed to the player, while the first discharge unit is viewed from the front of the gaming machine This makes it possible to reduce the visibility of the image and make it less noticeable.

  In this feature, after providing "the game board (the game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface", "a different direction from the front of the game machine" to "a direction along the front surface of the game board Or “a direction parallel to the front of the game board”.

Feature B6. Each said discharge part is provided with the opening which a game ball can pass,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5, wherein the opening of the first discharge part is smaller than the opening of the second discharge part.

  According to the above configuration, the opening of the first discharge part can be made less noticeable than the opening of the second discharge part, and the player can hardly notice the presence of the first discharge part. Even if the player notices the presence of the first discharge unit, the smaller opening portion prevents the game ball from having an impression of being easily entered. This makes it possible to reduce the anxiety of the player who cares about the presence of the first discharge unit, and to preferably suppress the decline in the gaming intention.

  In the present feature, the “opening” may be rephrased as “opening width”. Further, in the present feature, “each of the discharge units may be an opening through which game balls can pass” or “each discharge unit may be an opening through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass”.

  Feature B7. A plurality of game balls can pass through the opening of the second discharge unit, and one game ball can pass through the opening of the first discharge unit. Of gaming machines.

  In the above configuration, the plurality of game balls can be simultaneously entered into the second discharge unit, and the game balls in the game area are smoothly smoothed in the normal game state where the variable entry control is not performed. It is possible to suppress the stagnation of the game ball in the game area. On the other hand, the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry means while making the discharge of the game ball inconspicuous by keeping the opening of the first discharge part at the necessary minimum size capable of receiving the game ball. Can be discharged appropriately.

  Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B7, wherein the first discharge unit is disposed upstream of the second discharge unit.

  In the gaming machine, it is assumed that the discharge unit is often disposed at the lowermost portion (the most downstream portion) of the gaming area, and it is assumed that there are not many cases in which the player plays with such preconception. This feature uses this, and the first discharger that functions when the variable ball entry means is in the first state is disposed upstream of the second discharger that functions in the normal gaming state. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to be reduced by recognizing the first discharge part as the discharge port at first glance.

Feature B9. The variable ball entry means is
With a predetermined ball entry section (big winning opening 302),
An opening / closing body (opening / closing door 305) capable of opening / closing the predetermined ball entry portion;
Equipped with
The opening / closing body can be displaced to a second position (protrusion position) protruding to the front of the gaming machine beyond the first position by pivoting from the predetermined first position (retraction position) to the front of the gaming machine Yes,
The variable ball entry means is configured to be in the second state when the open / close body is in the first position, and to be in the first state when the open / close body is in the second position,
A game ball can flow down in front of the opening and closing body at the first position,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B8, wherein the first discharge part is disposed to the side of the opening / closing body.

  In the above configuration, when the opening / closing body is at the second position, the gaming ball received by the opening / closing body can be guided along the opening / closing body, so that the game ball can be guided to the first discharge unit side When the opening / closing body is in the first position, the game ball can be prevented from being guided to the first discharge portion side by the opening / closing body by passing in front of the opening / closing body. That is, the game ball can be distributed to the first discharging unit and the second discharging unit along with the execution of the variable ball entry control, and the configuration of the feature B1 can be realized with a relatively simple configuration. .

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the first discharge unit is disposed adjacent to the opening / closing body.

  According to the above configuration, since the first discharging unit and the opening / closing body are adjacent to each other, when the opening / closing body is at the second position, the game ball moving on the opening / closing body passes the opening / closing body. The game ball can be quickly entered into the first discharge part. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the flow of gaming balls from the opening / closing body to the first discharge part, and the entry of the game balls into the first discharge part becomes even less noticeable. Moreover, the distance between the first discharge portion and the predetermined ball entry portion can be shortened by bringing the first discharge portion and the opening / closing body adjacent to each other. This makes it possible to cause the first discharge part to enter the ball while making it appear as if the ball has entered the predetermined ball entry part, making it possible to make the discharge more inconspicuous.

  In the present feature, "disposed adjacent to the opening / closing body" may be reworded as "disposed adjacent to the opening / closing body in a front view from the front of the gaming machine".

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to feature B9 or B10, wherein an interval between the first discharge part and the opening / closing body is less than a diameter of the gaming ball.

  For example, if the game ball falls from between the first discharging portion and the opening / closing body, the player visually recognizes the game ball falling from the opening / closing body, and it is easy to hold an impression that the game ball is likely to spill There is a fear. In this respect, in the present configuration, since the game ball is prevented from falling from between the first discharge portion and the opening / closing body, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to give an impression that the game ball is easy to spill Can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B12. The opening / closing body includes a ball receiving portion (a rear surface portion 305c of the opening / closing door 305) capable of receiving gaming balls flowing down the game area when the opening / closing body is at the second position,
In any one of the features B9 to B11, the game apparatus further includes an inhibition means (protrusion portion 325) capable of inhibiting the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion to the first discharge portion side. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, for example, by adjusting the degree of inhibition by the inhibition means at the time of design of the gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the ease of entering the gaming ball into the first discharge part, and in the following, It becomes possible to adjust the ease of entering the gaming ball into the variable entry means (predetermined entry part).

  In this feature, "the inhibition means capable of inhibiting the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion to the first discharge portion side" is referred to as "the first of the game balls on the ball receiving portion Adjustment means capable of adjusting the easiness of movement to the discharge unit side "and" Distribution means capable of distributing gaming balls on the ball receiving portion to the first discharge side and the predetermined ball entrance side " It may be paraphrased.

  Feature B13. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B9 to B12, wherein the second discharge unit is disposed below the opening and closing body.

  According to the above configuration, since the second discharge unit is positioned below the opening and closing body, it is possible to naturally guide the game ball passing through the front of the opening and closing body at the first position to the second discharge unit. As a result, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the game ball can easily enter the second discharge part with a relatively simple configuration.

  Note that for each configuration of the features B1 to B13, any of the features A1 to A20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H7. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or to combine the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403) and a second ball entering portion (second winning hole portion 404) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
The game ball can enter the first ball part in the first state (closed state) where the game ball can not enter the ball or does not easily enter the ball, and the game ball can enter the ball in the first ball part or enters more than the first state. A movable body (opening and closing member 431) that can be switched to an easy second state (open state),
Switching control means for switching the movable body from the first state to the second state and then to the first state based on a predetermined trigger (the special winning opening and closing by the main control device 81) Function to execute processing),
Privilege giving means (disbursement control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to the player based on the ball entry of the game ball into each ball entry portion of the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion;
Equipped with
A ball receiving portion (second opening and closing plate 433) capable of receiving gaming balls flowing down the gaming area is provided in a situation where the movable body is at least in the first state,
When the movable body switches from the first state to the second state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to be capable of entering the second ball entry portion. A gaming machine to be.

  When switching control is performed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient ball entry into the first ball entry unit and to suppress unnecessary consumption of the game balls. For this reason, depending on the player, so-called stop strikes may be performed, such as refraining from firing the gaming ball at a timing when entering the first ball entry portion is unlikely to occur. However, if such technical intervention is performed excessively, the fairness of the game is disturbed and undesirable.

  In this respect, in the configuration described above, the first ball entry portion is provided with a ball receiving portion capable of receiving the game balls on the game area in the first state in which the ball entry is impossible or difficult to enter. The game ball received by the ball receiving unit becomes capable of entering the second ball entry based on switching from the second ball entry to the first ball entry possible or switchable to the second state where it is easy to enter the ball. There is. In this case, even if the game ball is fired at a timing at which the first ball entry portion does not easily cause ball entry, it is possible to cause the second ball entry portion to enter the ball via the ball receiving portion. As a result, it becomes possible to obtain benefits efficiently while suppressing the generation of wasted balls, and it is possible to have a configuration suited to the needs of the player. Not only that, it is also possible to suppress the ramping of the strikes, which is advantageous in securing the fairness of the game.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, the gaming ball received by the ball receiving unit can enter the second entering portion, not the first entering portion. For example, if the game ball received by the ball receiving unit is configured to enter the first ball entry unit, the case where the movable body enters the ball due to being in the first state (the ball receiving unit is not used In the case where the player enters the ball at the same time, the destination of the game ball is the same, which may make it difficult to identify which route the ball has entered in the gaming machine. In this respect, in the present configuration, since the ball destination of the game ball is different between the case of entering the ball through the ball receiving portion and the case of entering the ball without intervention, the ball was entered through any route in the gaming machine It becomes easy to identify the For this reason, for example, it becomes easy to differentiate by providing a difference in the degree of advantage in the former case and the latter case, and the configuration is advantageous in inducing a special feeling to the ball entering through the ball receiving portion. It can be done. Also, for example, in a configuration in which the game ball received in the ball receiving unit is caused to enter the first ball entering unit (the ball entering and closing unit by the movable body), the game ball heading toward the first ball receiving unit through the ball receiving unit; There is a concern that the game balls directed directly to the first ball entry section do not interfere via the ball receiving section, and the respective ball entry is inhibited. In this respect, in the present configuration, the occurrence of such an inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by separating the ball receiving portion via the ball receiving portion and the ball receiving portion not via the ball receiving portion.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to the feature C1, characterized in that when the movable body is in the first state, entry of the gaming ball into the second ball entry unit is not permitted.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball is placed (or stored) on the movable body during the period when the movable body is in the first state, and is released toward the second ball entry portion when switching to the second state It is possible to establish an innovative gameplay that has never been seen before. As a result, it is possible to give the player a fresh impression and to preferably increase the willingness to play.

  Feature C3. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, characterized in that when the movable body is in the second state, entry of the gaming ball into the second ball entry part is not permitted.

  According to the above configuration, the player is not required to enter the ball into the second ball entry portion in the second state in which the ball entry into the first ball entry portion is possible or easy to enter the ball. It is possible to concentrate on whether or not ball entry to the first ball entry part occurs without worrying about the ball entry part. In other words, it is possible to add a new game that causes the game ball to enter the second ball entry part while suppressing that the switching control that switches the movable body between the first state and the second state is affected. It will be possible. In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature C2, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the game ball to enter the second entry section when switching from the first state to the second state, and to the second entry section. It is advantageous in increasing the pleasure and surprise when entering the ball.

  Feature C4. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, characterized in that when the movable body is in the second state, the ball is allowed to enter the second ball entry portion.

  According to the above configuration, when the movable body is in the second state, it is possible to enjoy whether the game ball enters the second ball entry part as well as the first ball entry part. In other words, it is possible to impart an interest of which ball part enters the ball into which ball part, and the fun is improved compared to a uniform game of whether or not the game ball enters one ball part. It will be possible to

Feature C5. When the movable body switches from the first state to the second state, the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to be dropped downward,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the dropped gaming ball can enter the second ball entry portion.

  According to the above configuration, by switching from the first state to the second state, the ball receiving state in the ball receiving portion is reset together with the ball entering the second ball entering portion of the gaming ball received in the ball receiving portion. Can be As a result, when the movable body is returned to the first state, it becomes possible to start a new ball support without the gaming ball remaining on the ball support.

  Feature C6. The gaming machine according to the feature C5, wherein the second ball entering portion is disposed below the ball receiving portion and opens upward.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming ball dropped from the ball receiving portion can be easily entered into the second ball entry portion. In addition, the passage of the game ball from the ball receiving portion to the second ball entering portion can be simplified, and the occupied area of the passage in the game area can be reduced as compared with the case where the passage becomes complicated. Become. That is, in the gaming machine in which the gaming area is limited, the configuration can be optimized.

  Feature C7. The movable body is configured to be rotatable in a predetermined direction (game back-to-back direction), and is characterized in that switching from the first state to the second state is performed by the rotation. Or the gaming machine described in C6.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can be dropped by using the rotation of the movable body, and the configuration of the feature C5 or C6 can be realized by a relatively simple configuration. Become.

Feature C8. The movable body includes an opening and closing portion (first opening and closing plate 432) capable of opening and closing the first ball entering portion,
When the first ball receiving portion is in the first state by the opening and closing portion, the ball receiving portion is configured to project forward to the gaming machine than the opening and closing portion. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to receive the game balls in the ball receiving unit while restricting the game balls into the first ball entering unit by the opening and closing unit. Thus, it is possible to preferably suppress the inconvenience of entering the first ball entering portion despite the first state, for example, due to the game ball bouncing back due to contact with the ball receiving portion.

Feature C9. The movable body is configured to be switched from the first state to the second state by the rotation to the front of the gaming machine.
In front of the movable body, a predetermined game component (window panel 62) is disposed apart from the movable body,
The movable body includes an opening and closing part (first opening and closing plate 432) capable of opening and closing the first ball entering part, and the first ball entering part is brought into the second state by the opening and closing part. The gaming machine according to feature C7 or C8, wherein a distance (distance D2) between an end of the opening and closing part on the side of the gaming component and the gaming component is smaller than a diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from moving to the lower side of the movable body through the front of the opening and closing part when the first ball entering part is in the second state by the opening and closing part. That is, in the second state in which the first ball entry portion can or can easily enter the ball, the ball entry into the second ball entry portion does not occur, and the player takes care of the second ball entry portion. It is possible to concentrate on whether or not entering the first ball entry part occurs without doing. In other words, it is possible to add a new game that causes the game ball to enter the second ball entry part while suppressing that the switching control that switches the movable body between the first state and the second state is affected. It will be possible.

Feature C10. The movable body is configured to be switched from the first state to the second state by the rotation to the front of the gaming machine.
In front of the movable body, a predetermined game component (window panel 62) is disposed apart from the movable body,
The movable body includes an opening and closing part (first opening and closing plate 432) capable of opening and closing the first ball entering part, and the first ball entering part is brought into the second state by the opening and closing part. The gaming machine according to feature C7 or C8, wherein a distance (distance D2) between an end of the opening and closing part on the side of the gaming component and the gaming component is equal to or more than a diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the above configuration, when the first ball entry part is in the second state by the opening and closing part, it becomes possible for the gaming ball to pass the front of the opening and closing part and move below the movable body. That is, in the second state in which the first ball entry portion can or can easily enter the ball, the ball entry into the second ball entry portion can also occur, and the game ball is in either ball entry portion Can provide the fun of entering the ball. This makes it possible to improve the interest as compared to a uniform game whether or not the game ball enters one ball entry part.

Feature C11. A discharge unit (out port 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
The game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C10, comprising: means (the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433) capable of leading the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion to the discharge portion side The gaming machine described in any one.

  According to the above configuration, when the movable body is normalized to the first state without performing the switching control, that is, when the ball receiving portion continues to be in the ball receiving state for a long time, the ball receiving portion receives The game ball can be guided to the discharge unit and appropriately discharged from the game area. Thereby, it is suppressed that a game ball stays on a ball receiving part, and ball clogging in a ball receiving part and its peripheral field is controlled. For example, if ball clogging frequently occurs in these areas, the game arcade employee has an increased opportunity to get rid of the ball clogging, and the player may feel bothersome or a flow of gaming balls contrary to the design intention is constructed. Although there is a concern about inconveniences, this configuration makes it possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature C12. The lead-out means can lead the game ball received by the ball receiving portion toward the side of the ball receiving portion,
The gaming machine according to the feature C11, wherein the discharging unit is disposed adjacent to the ball receiving unit on the side of the ball receiving unit.

  According to the above configuration, the game balls can be easily derived from the ball receiving unit to the discharging unit. In addition, since the distance between the ball receiving portion and the discharging portion becomes short, it is visually confirmed without moving the sight line whether the game ball remains on the ball receiving portion or the ball has been inserted into the discharging portion. It is possible to achieve concentration of attention points. As a result, as compared with the case where it is necessary to visually recognize various places, distraction is suppressed, and the player can be configured to easily concentrate on the game.

  Feature C13. The gaming machine according to the feature C12, wherein the discharging unit is open to the ball receiving unit.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to smoothly enter the discharge unit using the momentum of the game ball moving on the ball receiving unit, and it is possible to suppress the stagnation of the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving unit. become. In addition, since the discharge unit can be made to enter the discharge unit without changing the moving direction of the game ball, the lead-out structure of the game ball to the discharge unit can be simplified.

Feature C14. When the movable body is in the first state, the game ball can move on the ball receiving unit,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C13, comprising a deceleration means (a protrusion 215) capable of decelerating the game ball moving on the ball receiving portion.

  According to the above configuration, the staying period of the gaming ball on the ball receiving portion can be extended compared to the case where there is no deceleration means, and from the first state to the second state before the gaming ball passes the ball receiving portion. It is possible to increase the probability that switching to As a result, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit can be made easy to enter into the second ball entering unit, and it becomes possible to preferably evoke gaming will.

  Feature C15. Means for differentiating the degree of advantage for the player between the case where the game ball enters the first ball entry and the case where the ball enters the second ball entry (The notification control process is executed by the effect control device 82 The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C14, characterized in that

  According to the above-described configuration, the game ball is not caused to enter the first ball game unit or the second game ball unit to avoid the discharge of the game ball, but the first ball game unit and the second ball game unit The value can be made different depending on where the game ball enters. For this reason, it becomes a matter of great interest to the player as to which ball entry portion the game ball enters, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature C16. Means for making it more advantageous for the player when entering the second ball entry portion than when the game ball enters the first ball entry portion (notification effect control processing by the effect control device 82 A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C15, which has a function of performing

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion, this is more advantageous than the case where the ball is entered into the first ball entry portion, so the ball entry into the second ball entry portion is realized. You can increase your happiness. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest in which ball entry section the ball enters, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C17. The benefit granting means is
First benefit giving means capable of giving a first benefit (a payout of a predetermined number of game balls) to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion;
The second benefit that is more advantageous for the player than the first benefit based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second entry portion (a combination of the payout of the predetermined number of gaming balls and the notification effect, more than the predetermined number A second benefit granting means capable of giving a payout of the game ball of
The gaming machine according to feature C16, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion, the second benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit awarded based on the ball entry into the first ball entry portion is provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase the joy when the second ball entering the ball is realized. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest in which ball entry section the ball enters, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  When the configuration of the feature C2 or C3 is applied to the feature C16 or C17, the opportunity for entering the second ball entry portion becomes limited, which is effective in boosting the game.

  Feature C18. Game state transition means (function to execute the game state transition process by the main control device 81) to shift to the special game state in which the switching control can be executed a plurality of times under a predetermined condition (a big hit result) A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C17, characterized in that it comprises.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion in the standby period (period in which the start of the next switching control is waited in the state where the first ball entry portion is in the first state) occurring between the switching control before and after It is possible to enter the second ball entry portion. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently obtaining benefits by suppressing the generation of wasted balls in the special gaming state.

Feature C19. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403) and a second ball entering portion (second winning hole portion 404) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
The game ball can enter the first ball part in the first state (closed state) where the game ball can not enter the ball or does not easily enter the ball, and the game ball can enter the ball in the first ball part or enters more than the first state. A movable body (opening and closing member 431) that can be switched to an easy second state (open state),
Switching control means for switching the movable body from the first state to the second state and then to the first state based on a predetermined trigger (the special winning opening and closing by the main control device 81) Function to execute processing),
Bonus granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a bonus to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry section;
Equipped with
A ball receiving portion (second opening and closing plate 433) capable of receiving gaming balls flowing down the gaming area is provided in a situation where the movable body is at least in the first state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball received by the ball receiving unit can enter the second ball receiving unit under predetermined conditions.

  When switching control is performed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient ball entry into the first ball entry unit and to suppress unnecessary consumption of the game balls. For this reason, depending on the player, so-called stop strikes may be performed, such as refraining from firing the gaming ball at a timing when entering the first ball entry portion is unlikely to occur. However, if such technical intervention is performed excessively, the fairness of the game is disturbed and undesirable.

  In this respect, in the above configuration, the ball receiving portion capable of receiving the game ball on the game area is provided in the first ball entering portion in the first state incapable of entering or difficult to enter the ball, and the ball receiving portion The game ball received by the player can enter the second ball entry portion. In this case, even if the game ball is fired at a timing at which the first ball entry portion does not easily cause ball entry, it is possible to cause the second ball entry portion to enter the ball via the ball receiving portion. As a result, it becomes possible to obtain benefits efficiently while suppressing the generation of wasted balls, and it is possible to have a configuration suited to the needs of the player. Not only that, it is also possible to suppress the ramping of the strikes, which is advantageous in securing the fairness of the game.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, the gaming ball received by the ball receiving unit can enter the second entering portion, not the first entering portion. For example, if the game ball received by the ball receiving unit is configured to enter the first ball entry unit, the case where the movable body enters the ball due to being in the first state (the ball receiving unit is not used In the case where the player enters the ball at the same time, the destination of the game ball is the same, which may make it difficult to identify which route the ball has entered in the gaming machine. In this respect, in the present configuration, since the ball destination of the game ball is different between the case of entering the ball through the ball receiving portion and the case of entering the ball without intervention, the ball was entered through any route in the gaming machine It becomes easy to identify the For this reason, for example, it becomes easy to differentiate by providing a difference in the degree of advantage in the former case and the latter case, and the configuration is advantageous in inducing a special feeling to the ball entering through the ball receiving portion. It can be done. Also, for example, in a configuration in which the game ball received in the ball receiving unit is caused to enter the first ball entering unit (the ball entering and closing unit by the movable body), the game ball heading toward the first ball receiving unit through the ball receiving unit; There is a concern that the game ball directly heading to the first ball entry section does not interfere with the ball reception section and interferes with each ball entry, but in the present configuration, the ball entry section via the ball reception section, and The occurrence of such an inconvenience is suitably suppressed by separating from the ball entering portion.

  Each configuration described in any one of the features C1 to C18 may be applied to the present feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

  Note that for each configuration of the features C1 to C19, any of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H7. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or to combine the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry unit (large winning opening 202, large winning opening 302, second winning opening 404) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Privilege giving means (disbursement control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion;
A discharge unit (out port 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the discharge unit is configured to open in the lateral direction of the game machine in a front view from the front of the game machine.

  In the above configuration, since the discharge unit is configured to open in the lateral direction of the gaming machine, it is difficult to visually recognize the opening of the discharge unit not only when viewed from the front of the gaming machine but also when looking down from the front of the gaming machine. Can. This makes it possible to discharge the game balls from the game area while making the discharge of the game balls inconspicuous.

Feature D2. A gaming board (gaming board 24) in which the gaming area is formed on the front surface thereof;
A projecting portion (left channel forming portion 131, right channel forming portion 161) which protrudes to the front of the gaming machine beyond the front surface of the gaming board;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to the feature D1, wherein the discharging unit is provided in the projecting portion so as to open in the lateral direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, since the discharge unit is formed to open in the lateral direction of the gaming machine in front of the front surface of the game board, the front surface (game area) of the game board can be A game ball flowing down can be favorably received by the discharge unit, and it can be set as a practically preferable embodiment in realizing the configuration of the feature D1.

Feature D3. The discharge portion is configured to open at a side surface portion (second vertical wall portion 138, 168) of the protrusion portion,
An overhanging means (overlapping portion 951) which is disposed forward of the opening of the discharge portion in the protrusion and in the opening direction of the opening than the side portion when viewed from above the gaming machine The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  In the above configuration, since the overhanging means is disposed in the front of the gaming machine with respect to the opening of the discharge part and is projected in the opening direction from the opening, not only the front view from the front of the gaming machine but also oblique Even when viewed from the above, the overhanging means shields the opening, making it difficult to visually recognize the opening. As a result, the visibility of the discharge part is further reduced, and it becomes possible to make the discharge part even less noticeable.

Feature D4. The discharge portion is configured to open at a side surface portion (second vertical wall portion 138, 168) of the protrusion portion,
The side surface portion is configured to be inclined with respect to the opening direction such that an end portion on the front side of the game machine is positioned closer to the opening direction of the opening than an end portion on the back side of the game machine. The gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3.

  According to the above configuration, the side surface in which the opening is formed is inclined, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the opening not only in front view from the front of the gaming machine but also when obliquely looking in, and discharging The visibility of the part can be further reduced.

Feature D5. The projecting portion is provided with a first region (second inclined portion 136) having a relatively high light transmittance and a second region having a relatively low light transmittance,
The game machine according to any one of the features D2 to D4, wherein the second area includes at least an area (area 131b) on the game machine front side of the opening of the discharge unit.

  In the above configuration, by providing the first region with high light transmittance in the projecting portion, for example, by providing the light emitting means behind the projecting portion, for example, a light emission effect such as brightly illuminating the first region is performed. It is possible to improve the appearance of the projection. However, in this case, it is not desirable in order to make the opening of the discharge part visible through the projection and to make the discharge part inconspicuous. In this respect, in the present configuration, the second region having a low light transmittance is provided, and the second region includes at least the region on the game machine front side of the opening of the discharge portion. This prevents the opening from being seen through in the front view from the front of the gaming machine, making it possible to make the discharge part more inconspicuous.

  This feature is particularly useful when applied to the feature D4. That is, in the configuration in which the opening is inclined as in the feature D4, the projected area of the opening in a front view from the front of the gaming machine tends to be large. Therefore, if the opening can be seen through the projection, the opening is easily noticeable, and the player can easily notice the presence of the discharge unit. By applying this feature to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the opening, and it is possible to preferably suppress the discharge portion (opening) from being noticeable.

Feature D6. The discharge portion is configured to open at a side surface portion (second vertical wall portion 138, 168) of the protrusion portion,
The discharge unit includes a guide passage (guide passage 141b) for guiding the gaming ball entering the opening in the lateral direction of the gaming machine,
The projecting portion is provided with a first region (second inclined portion 136) having a relatively high light transmittance and a second region having a relatively low light transmittance,
The game machine according to any one of the features D2 to D5, wherein the second area includes at least an area (area 131c) on the game machine front side of the guide passage part.

  In the above configuration, by providing the first region with high light transmittance in the projecting portion, for example, by providing the light emitting means behind the projecting portion, for example, a light emission effect such as brightly illuminating the first region is performed. It is possible to improve the appearance of the projection. However, in this case, the guide passage portion and the game ball moving in the passage portion can be seen through the projecting portion, which is not preferable in order to make the discharge portion inconspicuous. In this respect, in the present configuration, the second region having low light transmittance is provided, and the second region includes at least a region located in front of the guide passage. As a result, the guide passage portion and the game ball moving in the passage portion can be prevented from being seen through in a front view from the front of the game machine, and the discharge portion can be made more inconspicuous.

  When the feature is applied to the feature D5, the "first region" and the "second region" can be rephrased as the "first region" and the "second region", respectively.

Feature D7. The ball entry unit and the discharge unit each have an opening through which game balls can pass,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, wherein the discharge part has a smaller opening than the ball entry part.

  According to the above configuration, the discharge unit can be made less noticeable than the ball entry unit, and the player can hardly notice the presence of the discharge unit.

  In the present feature, the “opening” may be rephrased as “opening width”. Further, in the present feature, "the ball entering portion and the discharging portion are openings through which game balls can pass" and the "ball entering portions and the discharging portions are openings through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass" It may be paraphrased.

Feature D8. The first state (open state) in which the game ball can or can easily enter the ball in the ball entering portion, and the second state in which the game ball is unable to enter the ball in the ball into the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first state. A movable body (shutter 216, an open / close door 305, a second open / close plate 433) that can be switched to (closed state);
Switching control means for switching the movable body from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on a predetermined trigger (the special winning opening and closing by the main control device 81) Function to execute processing),
The discharge unit is disposed to the side of the movable body in a front view from the front of the gaming machine, and is configured to open to the movable body side, according to any one of the features D1 to D7. Gaming machine.

  In the above configuration, the discharge unit is disposed to the side of the movable body, and the discharge unit is opened on the movable body side. Therefore, not only from the front view of the gaming machine but also from the front of the gaming machine The visibility of the discharge unit can be reduced. Further, in the above configuration, since the game ball can smoothly enter the discharge unit using the momentum of the game ball flowing toward the side of the movable body, the flow of the game ball around the discharge unit It is suppressed that it stagnates, ball clogging occurs, etc. From the above, it becomes possible to discharge the game balls from the game area while making the discharge of the game balls inconspicuous.

Feature D9. The movable body is configured to be displaceable between a predetermined first position (retracted position) and a second position (projected position) protruding forward of the gaming machine beyond the first position, and is at the second position. In this case, it is possible to receive game balls flowing down the game area,
A feature D8 is characterized in that it has a deriving means (a first shutter inclined portion 217, a second shutter inclined portion 218) capable of leading out the gaming ball received by the movable body to the discharge portion side. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball is prevented from staying on the movable body, and ball clogging in the movable body and the peripheral region thereof is suppressed. For example, if ball clogging frequently occurs in these areas, the game arcade employee has an increased opportunity to get rid of the ball clogging, and the player may feel bothersome or a flow of gaming balls contrary to the design intention is constructed. Although there is a concern about inconveniences, this configuration makes it possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

  Feature D10. The game according to feature D9, wherein the movable body is configured to be in the first state when in the first position, and to be in the second state when in the second position. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, when switching control is not executed and the movable body is normalized to the first state, that is, when the movable body continues to be in the ball receiving state for a long time, the game ball received by the movable body Can be led out to the discharge unit and appropriately discharged from the game area.

  Feature D11. The game according to feature D9, wherein the movable body is configured to be in the second state when in the first position, and to be in the first state when in the second position. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming ball that did not enter the ball in the first state (a state in which the ball can enter or easily enter the ball) is guided to the discharge unit from the gaming area It can be discharged appropriately. In this case, since the discharge unit is less noticeable, it is possible to discharge the game balls that did not enter the ball entering unit while suppressing the emphasis on the discharge. As a result, it is possible to adjust the degree of ball entry of the game ball into the ball entry unit while suppressing a decrease in the game intention.

  Feature D12. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D8 to D11, wherein the discharge unit is disposed adjacent to the movable body.

  According to the above configuration, since the movable body (the ball entering portion) and the discharging portion are close to each other, it is possible to visually check which of the ball entering portion and the discharging portion has entered the game ball without visual line movement. It is possible to centralize the attention points. As a result, as compared with the case where visual recognition of various places is required, distraction can be suppressed, and the player can be configured to easily concentrate on the game.

  In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature D11, the discharge unit and the ball entry unit are close to each other, and the game unit enters the discharge unit while showing the game ball as if it were entering the ball entry unit. The effect of being able to make it flash and make the discharge more inconspicuous is expected.

  Feature D13. The gaming machine according to the feature D12, wherein an interval between the discharge unit and the movable body is less than a diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball is prevented from falling downward from between the movable body and the discharge unit, and an additional guide path for guiding the game ball from the movable body to the discharge unit is unnecessary. Can. As a result, the configuration for guiding the gaming ball to the discharge unit becomes simple, and the configuration can be optimized in the gaming machine in which the gaming area is limited.

  In the case where the present feature is applied to the feature D11, “for example, if the game ball falls from between the movable body and the discharge unit, the player may drop the game ball from the movable body. As a result of visual recognition, there is a possibility that it is easy to hold an impression that the game ball is likely to spill out.In this respect, in the present configuration, it is avoided for the game ball to fall from between the movable body and the discharge part. This makes it possible to make it difficult to give an impression that the game balls are likely to spill out, and it is possible to preferably suppress the decline in the game intention.

Feature D14. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
The first ball entry unit (large winning opening 202, big winning opening 302, second winning opening 404) which is provided in the game area and can enter game balls, and the second entrance (out ports 141, 171) When,
The game ball can enter the ball in the first ball entry part or can easily enter the ball in a first state (open state), and the game ball can not enter the ball in the first ball entry part or enters the ball than in the first state. Movable body (shutter 216, open / close door 305, second open / close plate 433) that can be switched to the difficult second state (closed state);
Switching control means for switching the movable body from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on a predetermined trigger (the special winning opening and closing by the main control device 81) Function to execute processing),
Bonus granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a bonus to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry section;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the second ball entering portion is disposed to the side of the movable body in a front view from the front of the game machine and is opened to the movable body side.

  In the above configuration, the second ball entering portion is disposed to the side of the movable body, and the second ball entering portion is opened to the movable body side. Therefore, not only a front view from the front of the gaming machine but also the front of the gaming machine Even when looking down, the visibility of the second ball entering portion can be reduced. Further, in the above configuration, since the gaming ball can be smoothly entered into the second ball entry part using the momentum of the game ball flowing toward the side of the movable body, the periphery of the second ball entry part At this time, the flow of the game balls is stagnated, and the occurrence of ball clogging is suppressed. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to make a game ball enter a 2nd ball entering part, making it hard to be conspicuous.

  Each configuration described in any one of the features D1 to D13 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

  Note that for each configuration of the features D1 to D14, any of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H7. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or to combine the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first ball entry unit (second winning opening 404, lower big winning opening 506) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
A second ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403, upper large winning opening 505) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Privilege giving means (disbursement control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to the player based on the ball entry of the game ball into each ball entry portion of the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion;
A first state (closed state) provided corresponding to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion, wherein the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are in a closed state; A movable body (opening and closing member 431) that can be switched to a second state (open state A) in which the ball entry portion is in an open state and a third state (open state B) in which the second ball entry portion is in an open state ,
Switching control means for switching and controlling the movable body (a function for executing the special winning opening / closing process by the main control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above configuration, the first state in which both the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are closed, the second state in which the first ball entering portion is opened, and the second ball entering portion are opened. It is configured to be switchable to the third state. For this reason, compared with a uniform game whether or not the game ball enters the one ball entry part, the ball entry aspect of the game ball can be diversified, and it becomes possible to improve the interest. Moreover, since such switching is realized by one movable body, when the operation of the movable body is started, there is a possibility that the first ball entering portion will be in the open state and the second ball entering portion is in the open state Can both occur. In this way, it is possible to impart an interest that predicts which ball entry part will be in the open state, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature E2. The switching control means is configured to cause the second state to pass through when the movable body switches from the first state to the third state (function to switch to the open state A via the open state B). The gaming machine according to the feature E1, characterized in that it comprises.

  In the above configuration, when the movable body switches from the first state to the third state, the behavior of the movable body up to the middle can be made to coincide with the behavior when switching from the first state to the second state. In the period in which the behavior of the movable body matches, it is unclear whether the second state or the third state is to be seen from the player, so the behavior of the movable body reveals the ball entry portion on the early opening side. Is avoided, which is advantageous in securing interest in predicting which ball entry section will be in an open state.

  Note that the present feature is that “the switching control means includes a first means for switching the movable body to the second state, and a second means for switching the movable body to the third state, and the second means In the case of switching the movable body to the third state, it can be rephrased as being capable of passing through the second state.

  Feature E3. The switching control means is configured to make the period in which the second state is reached shorter than the period in which the third state is reached when the movable body is switched to the third state via the second state. The gaming machine according to feature E2, comprising:

  For example, when the movable body is switched to the third state via the second state, if the configuration in which the period to be in the second state is longer than the period to be in the third state, entering the first ball entry part A ball is likely to be produced, which may obscure the difference from the case where the movable body switches to the second state. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the probability of entering the gaming ball to the first ball entry portion can be suppressed to a low level even though the second state is passed, and the movable body is switched to the second state Appropriate differentiation is possible.

Feature E4. The second ball entering portion is in a closed state when the movable body is in the second state,
The switching control means
First means for switching the movable body to the second state (function of switching the open / close member 431 to the open state A);
Second means for switching the movable body to the third state (function of switching the open / close member 431 to the open state B);
Equipped with
When the movable body is switched to the second state by the first means, and then the movable body is switched to the third state by the second means, the movable body is not switched to the first state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3, which is configured to be capable of being switched to three states.

  According to the above configuration, after the movable body is brought into the second state, transition to the third state is made without returning to the first state, so the period required for switching to the third state can be shortened. , Quick status switching becomes possible. In addition, by not interposing the first state in which both the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are in the closed state between the second state and the third state, the gaming ball is made into the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part. The occurrence of an event that does not enter the ball at any of the two ball entry parts is suppressed, and it is possible to realize efficient ball entry (acquisition of benefits).

Feature E5. A game state transition means (by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the round game in which the switching control is performed can be executed a plurality of times under a predetermined condition (a big hit result). Function to execute the game state transition process),
In the special game state, after switching the movable body to the second state by the first means in the previous round game, then switching the movable body to the third state by the second means in the subsequent round game The game machine according to Feature E4, characterized in that the movable body can be switched to the third state without switching to the first state.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to eliminate or extremely shorten the waiting period between the first round game and the second round game. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the gaming ball does not enter any of the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part, and it is possible to promote efficient ball entry (acquisition of benefits) Become. In addition, it is possible to progress the special gaming state with good tempo, and it is possible to improve time efficiency when playing a game. In the present feature, the “next round game” may be rephrased as the “next round game”.

Feature E6. A game state transition means (by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the round game in which the switching control is performed can be executed a plurality of times under a predetermined condition (a big hit result). Function to execute the game state transition process),
The switching control means
First means (a function of switching the open / close member 431 to the open state A) for performing a first switching control to switch the movable body to the second state;
Second means (a function of switching the open / close member 431 to the open state B) for performing second switching control to switch the movable body to the third state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, characterized in that the first switching control and the second switching control can be executed in one round game.

  According to the above configuration, it is expected that the player carefully sees the behavior of the movable body, since the ball entry portion which is likely to enter the ball in one round game changes, and the degree of attention to the game is suitably increased. Becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to diversify the flow of the game balls and the manner of entering the balls, as compared to a uniform game whether or not the game balls enter one ball entry part, and it is possible to improve the interest. Become.

  In addition, the game state transition means to shift this feature to a special game state (open / close execution mode) in which the round game in which the switching control is performed can be executed a plurality of times under a predetermined condition (a big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process by the main control device 81), and in one of the round games, switching the movable body to the second state and switching the movable body to the third state It may be rephrased as "It is characterized in that it is the composition that can carry out".

  Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, wherein the movable body is switchable to a fourth state in which the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are opened. .

  In the above configuration, there is a fourth state in which both the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part can enter the ball. In the second state and the third state, the player can predict to which ball part the game ball enters the ball from the state of the movable body to some extent, but in the fourth state, such prediction becomes difficult . By including such a state in the switching mode of the movable body, it is expected that the player's interest in the flow (the way) of the game ball will further increase, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased. become.

  Feature E8. When the movable body switches from the second state to the third state, a period in which the movable body is in the second state and a period in which the movable body is in the third state can be overlapped. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the movable body is in the fourth state at least in the overlapping period.

  According to the above configuration, the fourth state can be generated on the way from the second state to the third state, and compared with the case where only the switching from the second state to the third state is performed, The ball entering mode of the gaming balls of the ball entering part and the second ball entering part can be complicated, and the interest is improved.

Feature E9. The movable body is provided to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion so as to be in the first state at a predetermined position,
When the movable body is displaced in the first direction from the predetermined position, the second state is established, and when the movable body is displaced from the predetermined position in the second direction different from the first direction, the third state is established The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the gaming machine is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, it is changed by the displacement direction of the movable body from the predetermined position which one of the ball entry portions is in the open state, so that the player's interest in which direction the movable body is displaced increases. Conceivable. Therefore, it is expected that the player pays attention to the behavior of the movable body, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In the present feature, “first direction” and “second direction” may be “first direction” and “second direction”, “first advancing direction” and “second advancing direction”, or “first direction”, respectively. It may be rephrased as "side" and "second side".

  Feature E10. The gaming machine according to Feature E9, wherein the second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction.

  According to the above configuration, by making the movable body capable of reciprocating movement, each switching from the first state to the second state and from the first state to the third state can be realized, and the configuration is simplified. It is possible to In addition, when the displacement direction to be in the second state and the displacement direction to be in the third state are opposite to each other, there is also an advantage that the difference in the displacement direction of the movable body can be easily seen from the player.

  Feature E11. Means for differentiating the degree of advantage for the player between the case where the game ball enters the first ball entry and the case where the ball enters the second ball entry (The notification control process is executed by the effect control device 82 The game ball is characterized by having a function of changing the number of game balls paid out depending on whether the game ball has won the upper large winning opening 505 or the game ball has won the lower large winning opening 506. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10.

  According to the above configuration, the ball entering portion where the game ball can easily enter is not switched, and the joy of the player is made different depending on which of the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering the game ball enters. be able to. For this reason, it is expected that the interest of not only the player watching the behavior of the movable body, etc., but also the prediction of the ball entry portion in the open state is increased.

  Feature E12. Means for making it more advantageous for the player when entering the first ball entry portion than when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion (notice effect control processing by the effect control device 82 And a function to pay out more game balls than when the game ball has won the upper large winning opening 505 when the game ball has won the lower large winning opening 506. The gaming machine according to the feature E11.

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the first ball entry portion, it is more advantageous than the case where the ball enters the second ball entry portion, so the ball entry into the first ball entry portion is realized. You can increase your happiness. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest in which ball entry section the ball enters, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E13. The benefit granting means is
First benefit giving means capable of giving a first benefit to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion;
Second benefit giving means capable of giving a second benefit which is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion;
The gaming machine according to feature E12, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the first ball entry part, the second benefit more advantageous than the first benefit awarded based on the ball entry into the second ball entry part is provided Therefore, it is possible to increase the joy when the first ball entering the ball is realized. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest in which ball entry section the ball enters, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E14. Special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that causes at least one of the second state and the third state based on a predetermined specific trigger (big hit result) Function to execute the game state transition process by
In the case of the predetermined game result (when the jackpot type is distributed to the 15R normal jackpot result), the game state after the end of the special game state is to be the first game state (low probability mode), the predetermined In the case of the game result different from the game result (when the jackpot type is distributed to the implicit probability change 15R big hit result), the second game state after the end of the special game state is different from the first game state State means (function to execute transition processing (step S412) at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main control device 81) to be
Equipped with
The switching control means is the number of times the second state is reached in the special game state or the third state when the game state after the end of the special game state is changed to the first game state by the state means. The switching control is performed such that the probability that the number of times the game is played is greater than the predetermined number is different from the case where the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is made the second gaming state by the state means A game machine according to any one of the features E1 to E13, characterized in that it comprises means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to impart an interest of estimating the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state from the number of times the movable body is in the second state or the number of times in the third state in the special gaming state. As a result, the player's interest in the behavior of the movable body greatly increases, and it becomes possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game. In the present feature, “probability” includes 0%, and “predetermined number of times” includes 0 times.

Feature E15. Special gaming state transition means (a game by the main control device 81) to shift to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which a round game can be executed multiple times based on a predetermined specific trigger (that will be a big hit result) Function to execute state transition processing),
In the case of the predetermined game result (when the jackpot type is distributed to the 15R normal jackpot result), the game state after the end of the special game state is to be the first game state (low probability mode), the predetermined In the case of the game result different from the game result (when the jackpot type is distributed to the implicit probability change 15R big hit result), the second game state after the end of the special game state is different from the first game state State means (function to execute transition processing (step S412) at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main control device 81) to be
Equipped with
The switching control means is in the second state in a predetermined round game in the special gaming state when the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is made the first gaming state by the state means. Means for executing the switching control such that the probability or the probability of becoming the third state is different from the case where the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is made the second gaming state by the state means A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E13, characterized in that it comprises.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to impart an interest of estimating the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state from the state of the movable body in the predetermined round game. As a result, the player's interest in the behavior of the movable body greatly increases, and it becomes possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since it is sufficient if attention is paid to the behavior of the movable body in a predetermined round game, the game is compared to the case where all round games played in the special game state are targeted or the round game to be noted is not determined. Can reduce the burden on people. In the present feature, “probability” includes 0%.

Feature E16. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first ball entry unit (second winning opening 404, lower big winning opening 506) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
A second ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403, upper large winning opening 505) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
One opening / closing means (opening / closing member 431) provided corresponding to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion and capable of opening and closing the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion;
Opening / closing control means (a function for executing the special winning opening / closing process by the main control device 81) which controls the opening / closing means to operate in a predetermined operation mode determined in advance;
A unit (the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is made different from the case where the game ball enters the first ball entry part and the case where the game ball enters the second ball entry part) The function to execute the notice effect based on the winning, the function to make the number of game balls paid out different when the gaming ball is winning in the upper large winning opening 505 and when the gaming ball is winning in the lower large winning opening 506) ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, switching of the open / close state of the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion is realized by one opening / closing means. That is, since the ball entering portion and the opening / closing means correspond in many pairs, when the opening / closing means operates, the ball entering portion switched to the open state is not uniquely determined, and any ball entering portion is opened. It is possible to add interest in predicting Moreover, since the degree of advantage for the player is different between entering the first ball entry into the first ball entry and entering the second ball into the second entry ball, it is of great interest to the player as to which ball entry part is in the open state. It becomes a matter. As a result, the player is expected to be more interested in the behavior of the opening / closing means, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Each configuration described in any one of the features E1 to E15 may be applied to the present feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

  Note that for each configuration of the features E1 to E16, any of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H7. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or to combine the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry unit (first winning opening 403, big winning opening 202) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
An open state (opened state) provided corresponding to the ball entering portion and the gaming ball can or can easily enter the ball entering portion, and the gaming ball can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion or the open state A movable body (opening and closing members 631, 731) that can be switched to a closed state (closed state) in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball,
Switching control means for switching the movable body from the closed state to the open state based on a predetermined specific trigger, and then to the closed state (a special winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81 Function to execute)
Privilege giving means (disbursement control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion;
Equipped with
A ball receiving portion (a second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 and an upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732) capable of receiving gaming balls flowing down the gaming area is provided in a state where the movable body is at least in the closed state. It has been
The ball receiving unit is configured to be capable of moving the game ball received by the ball receiving unit in a predetermined direction (direction toward the out port 141, 171),
A game characterized in that it is provided with a variable means (function to switch between closed state A and closed state B) capable of changing the ease of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction in the ball receiving portion. Machine.

  In the above configuration, since the bonus is given to the game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, the player can play the game ball in the entry portion when the movable body is in the open state. You can enjoy whether or not to enter the ball. In addition, in the above configuration, there is a ball receiving portion capable of receiving the game ball in a state where the movable body is in the closed state, and the easiness of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction on the ball receiving portion It is possible to change. For this reason, when the movable body is in the closed state, the flow of the gaming ball on the ball receiving portion is diversified, and the movement of the gaming ball can be changed. Thereby, not only when the movable body is in the open state, but also when it is in the closed state, the player's interest in the behavior of the gaming ball can be gathered, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased. It will be possible.

  In addition, in this configuration, the ease of movement of the gaming ball in the predetermined direction on the ball receiving portion can be varied, which has the advantage of widening the range of game design. That is, in the design of the gaming machine, for example, when it is desirable that the gaming ball does not easily move on the ball receiving unit under certain circumstances, if the ball receiving unit has a structure in which the gaming ball is difficult to move And may affect other situations. In this respect, according to the present configuration, it is possible to use the ease of movement according to the situation even in the same closed state, and it is possible to alleviate restrictions on game design. Thereby, the realization of a more entertaining gaming machine can be promoted.

  Feature F2. When the movable body is switched from the closed state to the open state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to be capable of entering the ball entering portion as described in the feature F1. Gaming machine.

  In the above configuration, when the movable body is switched from the closed state to the open state, the gaming ball is placed on the ball receiving portion, and the gaming ball can enter the ball entering portion. In this case, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit in the closed state has a higher probability of entering the ball entering the ball as the staying period on the ball receiving unit is longer. For this reason, by changing the ease of movement of the gaming ball in the predetermined direction on the ball receiving portion, that is, the ease of passage of the ball receiving portion, for example, the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion enters. It is possible to create a special state that is easy to enter the ball part separately from the other state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature F3. A first ball entry part as the ball entry part;
A second ball entry unit (second winning opening 404) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Equipped with
The privilege giving means is a means capable of giving a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry part (a prize sphere of the game sphere based on the second prize opening 404) Equipped with a function to pay out
When the movable body is switched from the open state to the closed state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the same effect as the feature F2 can be obtained. In addition, in the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit can enter the second ball entering portion, not the first ball entering portion. For example, if the game ball received by the ball receiving unit is configured to enter the first ball entry unit, the case where the movable body enters the ball due to being in the first state (the ball receiving unit is not used In the case where the player enters the ball at the same time, the destination of the game ball is the same, which may make it difficult to identify which route the ball has entered in the gaming machine. In this respect, in the present configuration, since the ball destination of the game ball is different between the case of entering the ball through the ball receiving portion and the case of entering the ball without intervention, the ball was entered through any route in the gaming machine It becomes easy to identify the For this reason, for example, it becomes easy to differentiate by providing a difference in the degree of advantage in the former case and the latter case, and the configuration is advantageous in inducing a special feeling to the ball entering through the ball receiving portion. It can be done.

Feature F4. The gaming state includes a first gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the switching control is executed, and a second gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the switching control is not executed.
The variable means is
The ease of movement of the gaming ball in the predetermined direction in the ball receiving portion is the first state in which the gaming ball is relatively movable (closed state A), and the second state in which the gaming ball is relatively difficult to move. It can be switched to (closed state B),
A state change unit (function to be in the closed state B in at least one round game in the open / close execution mode) having the second state in at least a part of the first gaming state is provided. The gaming machine according to feature F2 or F3.

  According to the above configuration, in the first gaming state in which the switching control is performed, the period of stay of the gaming ball on the ball receiving portion is extended, and as a result, the ball entering through the ball receiving portion is under the first gaming state. It becomes easy to occur. As a result, interest can be enhanced, and it is possible to appropriately motivate the game.

  In the present feature, "as a gaming state, there is a first gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the switching control is executed and a second gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the switching control is not executed". “A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery for success or failure by the main control device 81) for performing a lottery for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is the lottery result of the lottery means Game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for transitioning the game state to the special game state when the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state is obtained; In other words, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, the switching control means is configured to execute the switching control, and then "the first gaming state" and the "second gaming state" Another game state "and may be paraphrased as" normal game state ". Also, "the switching control is performed" may be reworded as "the switching control is performed a plurality of times".

  Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the state change unit is configured to be in the first state when in the second gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, in the second gaming state in which the switching control is not executed, the flow of gaming balls on the ball receiving portion is facilitated, and ball clogging in the ball receiving portion and the peripheral area thereof is suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the ball via the ball receiving unit in the first gaming state while avoiding the influence on the second gaming state.

  Feature F6. The game apparatus is provided with a discharge section (out port 141, 171) which is provided in the game area and can discharge the game ball which has passed through the ball receiving section by movement in the predetermined direction from the game area. The gaming machine according to feature F5.

  In the second gaming state, in addition to the switching control not being executed, the flow of gaming balls in the ball receiving portion is smoothed, so the game balls pass from the ball receiving portion to the next, and the ball receiving portion It becomes easy for game balls to accumulate on the downstream side of In this respect, in the present configuration, since the game balls having passed through the ball receiving unit can be appropriately discharged from the game area, the game balls are accumulated on the downstream side of the ball receiving unit, the flow of the game balls stagnates, or the ball jam occurs. Can be suppressed.

  Feature F7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F4 to F6, wherein the state change unit is configured to execute switching to the second state in response to execution of the switching control.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch to the second state by performing the switching control, and to have a configuration suitable for setting the second state in the first gaming state. In the present feature, the configuration of “maintaining the state immediately before the switching control is not performed” may be further limited.

Feature F8. As the switching control, first switching control in which the switching control is performed in a predetermined aspect (an aspect in FIGS. 49 (a) to (e), an aspect in FIG. 52 (a)), and the predetermined aspect And second switching control in which the switching control is performed in a mode different from the mode (a mode in FIGS. 49 (e) to 49 (g), a mode in FIG. 52 (b)),
The state changing means is provided with means for being in the second state when the first switching control is performed, and in the first state when the second switching control is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F4 to F7.

  According to the above configuration, since the mode of the switching control of the movable body corresponds to the state of the ball receiving portion, the player who is interested in either the first state or the second state moves the movable body. It is considered to be closely watched, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, when switching control is executed a plurality of times in the first gaming state, by controlling which of the first switching control and the second switching control each time switching control is performed, the first state and the second state It is possible to control which of the two, and to diversify the state switching pattern. Furthermore, by making final switching control in the first gaming state the second switching control, it is possible to start the second gaming state in the state returned to the first state. Thereby, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball receiving portion in the second gaming state, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that ball clogging or the like is induced.

Feature F9. A first position (the position of the closed state A in FIG. 48 (a), the position of the closed state A in FIG. 52 (a)) which is part of the movable body or receives power of the movable body; Specific body (movable plate 651, extension part 735) operable to the second position (the position in the closed state B in FIG. 48 (b), the position in the closed state B in FIG. 52 (b)) different from the one position. Equipped with
In the features F4 to F8, the specific body is placed in the first position to be in the first state, and the specific body is placed in the second position to be in the second state The gaming machine described in any one.

  According to the above configuration, the specific body is operated in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, and it is possible to change the ease of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction in the ball receiving portion by the positional displacement of the specific body. It is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated drive for the control and the ball receiver.

Feature F10. The ball receiving portion has a first ball receiving surface (upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433) and a second ball receiving surface (a second surface portion of the movable plate 651) having different eases of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction. 658), and the second ball receiving surface is configured to make it more difficult for the gaming ball to move in the predetermined direction than the first ball receiving surface,
The first state is to receive gaming balls on the first ball receiving surface, and the second state is to receive gaming balls on the second ball receiving surface. Features F4 to F8 The gaming machine according to any of the above.

  According to the above configuration, switching between the first state and the second state can be realized by switching the ball receiving surface, and a practically preferable embodiment is to realize the configuration of any one of the features F4 to F8. Can. In addition, the player can easily recognize which of the first state and the second state is in by changing the state by such face switching.

Feature F11. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry unit (first winning opening 403, big winning opening 202) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
An open state (opened state) provided corresponding to the ball entering portion and the gaming ball can or can easily enter the ball entering portion, and the gaming ball can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion or the open state A movable body (opening and closing members 631, 731) that can be switched to a closed state (closed state) in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball,
Switching control means for switching the movable body from the closed state to the open state based on a predetermined specific trigger, and then to the closed state (a special winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81 Function to execute)
Privilege giving means (disbursement control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion;
A first position (the position of the closed state A in FIG. 48 (a), the position of the closed state A in FIG. 52 (a)) which is part of the movable body or receives power of the movable body; Specific body (movable plate 651, extension part 735) operable to the second position (the position in the closed state B in FIG. 48 (b), the position in the closed state B in FIG. 52 (b)) different from the one position. When,
It is possible to receive gaming balls flowing down the gaming area in a state in which the movable body is at least in the closed state, and the first state and the first state in which the ease of movement of the received gaming balls in a predetermined direction is different A ball receiving portion (a second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651, an upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732) which can be switched to the two states;
Equipped with
The ball receiving portion is in the first state by the specific body being disposed at the first position, and is in the second state by the specific body being disposed at the second position. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the same effect as the feature A1 can be obtained. In addition, a special object that operates in conjunction with the movement of the movable body is provided, and the easiness of movement of the gaming ball in the ball receiving portion in the predetermined direction can be changed by the position displacement of the specific object. A dedicated drive for the ball receptacle can be dispensed with.

  Each configuration described in any of the features F1 to F10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature F12. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
An open state (opened state) provided in the game area, where the game ball can enter or easily enter the ball, and a closed state (closed state) in which the game ball is not enterable or difficult to enter compared to the open state. Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 201, 401) that can be switched to
Variable ball entering control means (the main controller 81 performs variable ball entering control to make the variable ball entering means open from the closed state to the open state based on a predetermined specific trigger, and then put into the closed state) Function to execute the special winning opening and closing process),
Bonus giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a bonus to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means;
Equipped with
In the variable entering means, a plurality of aspects including the first aspect (the closing state A) determined in advance and the second aspect (the closing state B) different from the first aspect. It is possible to switch,
When the variable ball entering control means changes the variable ball entering means from the open state to the closed state, the mode of the closed state of the variable ball entering means is any one of the plurality of modes. Aspect control means (function to switch between closed state A and closed state B),
A game machine characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is different when the closed state of the variable ball entry means is the first mode and the second mode.

  According to the above configuration, the closed state has a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode, and one of the plurality of modes when the variable ball entry means is closed. Be done. In this way, it is possible to provide an enjoyment to enjoy in which manner the variable ball entry means is in the closed state, and in comparison with a uniform game in which the variable ball entry means is merely opened and closed. It is possible to improve. In addition, since the degree of advantage for the player is different between the case where the closed state is the first mode and the case where the closed state is the second mode, there is a strong interest in which mode the variable ball entry means is closed. It is possible to make it possible to increase the level of attention to the game.

  Each configuration described in any one of the features F1 to F11 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

  Note that for each configuration of the features F1 to F12, any of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H7. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or to combine the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A passage formation body (opening and closing member 431) provided in the game area and capable of forming a passage portion of the game ball;
Equipped with
In the passage forming body, a predetermined surface of the passage forming body (upper surface portion 483b of the second opening and closing plate 483) faces upward, and the predetermined surface forms a floor portion of the passage portion (FIG. 42 (a And the second position where the gaming ball on the floor can be dropped downward (the open state B in FIG. 42B). And can be rotated to the
An erected portion (first opening and closing plate 432) which rises upward when the passage forming body is at the first position on the predetermined surface of the passage forming body and extends in the passage direction of the passage forming body A game machine characterized by being provided.

  According to the above configuration, by rotating the passage forming body, the game ball on the passage portion is dropped and made to flow downward to the lower side of the passage forming body, and the new gaming ball is made to fall below the passage forming body by the rising portion. Can be suppressed. This limits the opportunity for the game ball to flow downward to the passage formation body, and can increase the joy when the game ball falls. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the rising portion is separated from the turning tip portion of the predetermined surface by a diameter equal to or more than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the above configuration, when the passage forming body is at the first position, the game ball can be placed in front of the rising portion on the predetermined surface, and when the passage forming body is rotated to the second position, from the predetermined surface It is possible to prevent the falling of the game ball from being blocked by the standing portion. That is, the function of dropping the gaming ball received on the predetermined surface and the function of suppressing the further dropping of the gaming ball can both be favorably achieved.

  Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the rising portion is provided at an end of the predetermined surface opposite to the rotating tip.

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature G2 can be enhanced, and an optimum configuration can be achieved in realizing the configuration of the feature G2.

  Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3, wherein the rising portion extends over the entire length of the predetermined surface in the passage direction.

  According to the above configuration, when the passage formation body is in the second position, it is possible to suppress the game ball from passing through the side of the rising portion and flowing into the lower side of the passage formation body, and the gaming ball below the passage formation body It can be a preferable embodiment in limiting the inflow opportunity.

  Feature G5. In the situation where the passage formation body is in the first position, a predetermined space portion (first winning opening portion 403 and first ball passage 405) is provided on the gaming machine rear side of the rising portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4.

  When the passage forming body is in the second position, the game ball is placed on the rising portion, and when the passage forming body is rotated to the first position in that state, the game ball is between the rising portion and the object behind the rising portion. There is a risk of pinching and biting. In this respect, in the present configuration, since the space is provided behind the rising portion, the gaming balls on the rising portion can be released to the space, and the occurrence of the bite can be suppressed.

  Feature G6. The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the space unit can accommodate one or more gaming balls.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of ball biting.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, comprising guiding means (first ball passage 405) capable of guiding the gaming ball having entered the space portion to another area.

  According to the above configuration, accumulation of gaming balls in the space portion can be suppressed, and generation of ball biting can be further suitably suppressed.

Feature G8. It is provided in the gaming area, and has a first ball entry portion (out port 141, 171) and a second ball entry portion (second winning port portion 404) capable of entering game balls.
The game ball having passed through the passage portion can enter the first ball entry portion, while the game ball dropped from the passage portion can enter the second ball entry portion,
A feature G1 is characterized in that the configuration is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion than when the game ball enters the first ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of G7.

  According to the above configuration, it is advantageous for the player to drop the game ball halfway through the passage rather than crossing the passage, so that the passage forming body is turned while the game ball is moving through the passage. The feeling of anticipation for the occurrence can be suitably expressed. In addition, it is assumed that the player is strongly interested in the behavior of the game ball and the passage formation body, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature G9. While it is possible to award a benefit based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second entry section, there is no opportunity for awarding a benefit based on the entry of the game sphere into the first entry section. The gaming machine according to feature G8, which is a feature.

  According to the above configuration, since the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are differentiated depending on the presence or absence of the benefit award, it is possible to further evoke a sense of expectation for the game ball to fall from the passage portion It is possible to enhance the effect of the above-mentioned feature G2.

  Feature G10. When the passage forming body is in the first position, the passage portion covers the gaming ball flow path (passage portion 408) to the lower side of the passage forming body from above, while the passage forming body is the second The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G9, wherein the standing portion covers the gaming ball flow channel from the upper side when in the position.

  According to the above configuration, even when the passage forming body is in either of the first position and the second position, the gaming ball flow path to the lower side of the passage forming body is covered from above, so the first position and the second position The inflow of the game ball to the game ball flow channel can be regulated with both. Thereby, the inflow opportunity of the game ball to the game ball flow channel is restricted to the process (when switching from the first position to the second position) in which the passage formation body pivots from the first position to the second position. Can increase the joy when it flows into the game ball channel.

Feature G11. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A passage formation body (opening and closing member 431) provided in the game area and capable of forming a passage portion of the game ball;
Equipped with
In the passage forming body, a predetermined surface of the passage forming body (upper surface portion 483b of the second opening and closing plate 483) faces upward, and the predetermined surface forms a floor portion of the passage portion (FIG. 42 (a And the second position where the gaming ball on the floor can be dropped downward (the open state B in FIG. 42B). And can be rotated to the
The predetermined surface of the passage forming body is provided with a projecting portion (first opening and closing plate 432) that protrudes upward when the passage forming body is in the first position,
A game machine characterized in that the projecting portion is provided at an end of the predetermined surface opposite to a rotating tip of the passage forming body.

  According to the above configuration, when the passage forming body is rotated, the gaming ball on the passage portion is dropped and made to flow downward to the lower side of the passage forming body, and the new gaming ball is below the passage forming body by the projecting portion. Can be suppressed. This limits the opportunity for the game ball to flow downward to the passage formation body, and can increase the joy when the game ball falls. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Each configuration described in any one of the features G1 to G10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

  Note that for each configuration of the features G1 to G11, any of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F12, and the features H1 to H7. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or to combine the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first starting ball entry portion (upper operation port 33) and a second starting ball entry portion (third operation port 803) provided in the game area;
First information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for the upper operation opening 33 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first starting ball storage unit;
First application determination means for performing first application determination on whether or not the special information acquired by the first information acquisition means corresponds to the application information (performs a process of determining whether the upper operation port 33 is performed by the main control device 81 Function),
A second information acquisition unit (a function for executing a winning process for the third operation port 803 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the second starting ball storage unit;
A second acquired information storage unit (second reserved area Rb for the second result display unit of the reserved ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the second information acquisition unit with a predetermined number determined in advance as an upper limit;
If a second assignment determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the second information acquisition means corresponds to the addition information, and a plurality of special information are stored in the second information acquisition means Second application determination means for sequentially performing the second application determination on the plurality of pieces of special information (a function for executing a yes / no determination process for the third operation port 803 by the main control device 81);
A special game which is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state when the result of the provision corresponding to the determination result by the first provision determination means or the second provision determination means corresponds to the provision information. A gaming machine configured to shift to a state,
An open state (open state) provided in the game area and the game ball can enter or easily enter the ball, and a closed state (closed state) in which the game ball can not enter the ball or is harder to enter than the open state. Variable entering means (variable winning device 802) that can be switched to
Bonus giving means (payout control device 97) capable of giving a bonus to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means;
Equipped with
When the game state is shifted to the special game state, the variable ball entering control is changed from the closed state to the open state, and thereafter, the variable ball entering control is performed to make the closed state,
The second grant determination is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first grant determination,
In the special game state, the game ball can enter or easily enter the second starting ball storage unit in the first state, and in the normal game state, the game ball is stored in the second starting ball storage unit A game machine characterized by comprising specifying means (second opening and closing plate 433) for setting a second state in which the player is unable to enter the ball or to enter the second state which is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state.

  According to the above configuration, the ball entering the second starting ball entry corresponding to the second award determination advantageous to the player is a configuration that occurs or is likely to occur in the special game state in which the variable ball entry control is executed. The player has the right to receive the second award of the advantageous side in the subsequent game, as well as obtaining the privilege award by entering the variable ball entry means by the transition of the gaming state to the special gaming state. It becomes possible to acquire. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, since the ball does not or does not easily enter the second starting ball entry portion, it is possible to suppress that the game is played under conditions that are excessively advantageous for the player. As described above, according to the present configuration, it is possible to add value to the special gaming state and to improve the attraction of the special gaming state while avoiding the influence on the normal gaming state.

Feature H2. The first acquisition information storage unit (the first result display area holding area Ra of the holding ball storage area 114b) stores the special information acquired by the first information acquisition unit with a predetermined first predetermined number as the upper limit. ,
The first assignment determination unit is configured to perform the first assignment determination based on the special information stored in the first information acquisition unit.
Acquired based on entering the ball of the game ball to the second starting ball entry section rather than the first grant determination for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting ball entry section It is characterized by the feature H1 characterized by having a priority means (function which performs data setting processing by the main control device 81) which can be performed by giving priority to the said 2nd addition judgment about special information to be carried out. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, since the second awarding determination is performed prior to the first awarding determination, the special information corresponding to entering the first start ball entry section at the end of the special game state, and Even if both of the special information corresponding to the entry into the starting ball entry portion are stored, the second assignment determination on the advantageous side is preferentially performed. As a result, although the second starting ball entry portion is entered in the special game state, the first grant determination on the side disadvantageous to the second grant determination may be performed in the game after the end of the game. Be suppressed. When the present feature is applied to the feature H1, the "predetermined number" in the second acquired information storage means can be paraphrased as the "second predetermined number".

  Feature H3. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2, wherein the second starting ball entry unit is provided downstream of the variable entry means in the gaming area.

  For example, if the second starting ball entry portion is configured to exist upstream of the variable ball entry means, entering the second start ball entry portion prevents the game ball from reaching the variable ball entry means, resulting in Entry into the variable entry means may be inhibited. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the second starting ball entry portion is located downstream of the variable ball entry means, the game ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means enters the second start ball entry portion As a result, entering the second starting ball entry portion is inhibited from blocking entry into the variable entry means. This makes it possible to cause or facilitate entry of the second start entry ball in the special game state while suppressing influence on the entry situation into the variable entry means.

Feature H4. The specifying means restricts the game ball from flowing into the specific area (the lower area of the variable winning device 802) in the normal game state, and the game ball is in the specific area in the special game state. A means (second opening and closing plate 433) for allowing inflow;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H3, wherein the gaming ball having flowed into the specific area is configured to be capable of entering the second starting ball entry unit.

  According to the above configuration, the relatively simple configuration of switching whether or not to allow inflow of the gaming ball to the specific area according to the gaming state makes the first state in the special gaming state, and the normal gaming state In such a case, the configuration to be in the second state can be realized, and it can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing the configuration of the feature H1.

Feature H5. A third starting ball entry portion (lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and different from the first starting ball entry portion and the second starting ball entry portion;
The first mode (the open state of the motorized accessory 34a) in which the gaming ball can be received or easily received by the third starting ball storage unit, and the gaming ball can not be received in the third starting ball storage unit or more than the first embodiment Receiving means (motorized item 34a) that can be switched to the second mode (the closed state of the motorized item 34a) which is not acceptable;
An acceptance control unit (function to execute a process for electronic support by the main control device 81) that performs the acceptance control according to the second aspect to the first aspect, and thereafter performs the acceptance control according to the second aspect;
A passing portion (through gate 35) provided in the gaming area and through which gaming balls can pass;
Acceptance information acquisition means (function to execute winning processing for through by the main control device 81) for acquiring information for acceptance based on passage of the gaming ball through the passing portion;
Acceptance determination means (performing an electronic combination open lottery by the main control device 81) performing acceptance determination of whether or not to execute the acceptance control by the acceptance control means based on the acceptance information acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means Function),
Equipped with
The second information acquisition means is configured to acquire the special information based on the ball entry of the game ball into each start ball entry part of the second start ball entry part and the third start ball entry part. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4.

  According to the above configuration, since the third starting ball entry unit corresponding to the second awarding determination is provided separately from the second starting ticket entering unit, it is possible to secure an opportunity to receive the second awarding determination in the normal gaming state become. Moreover, when the acceptance determination performed based on the passage of the gaming ball to the passing portion becomes a predetermined result and the receiving means is switched to the first mode, the gaming ball can enter or enter the third starting ball entry portion Since the configuration is facilitated, it is suppressed that the frequency of ball entry to the third starting ball entry part in the normal gaming state becomes excessively high. As a result, it is suppressed that the player is excessively advantageous, and it is also suppressed that the significance of providing the second starting ball entry portion is reduced.

Feature H6. The specifying means restricts the game ball from flowing into the specific area (the lower area of the variable winning device 802) in the normal game state, and the game ball is in the specific area in the special game state. A means (second opening and closing plate 433) for allowing inflow;
The game ball having flowed into the specific area is configured to be capable of entering the second starting ball entry unit,
The gaming machine according to the feature H5, wherein the third starting ball entry unit is disposed upstream of the specific region in the gaming region.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that even the entry of the game ball into the third starting ball entry unit is restricted along with the restriction of the inflow of the game ball into the specific area. Thereby, it is possible that the game ball does not enter the ball in the second start ball part or does not enter while suppressing that the ball ball situation of the game ball in the third ball entry part is affected. become.

Feature H7. The specifying means includes ball receiving means (second opening and closing plate 433) capable of receiving gaming balls when the variable ball entering means is in the closed state,
The ball receiving means restricts the game ball from flowing below the ball receiving means when the variable ball entering means is in the closed state, and the variable ball entering means changes from the closed state to the open state. The game ball can be dropped downward from the ball receiving means on the basis of being switched,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H6, wherein the gaming ball having flowed under the ball receiving means is capable of entering the second starting ball receiving part.

  According to the above configuration, by switching the ball entry means in conjunction with the transition to the special game state, switching to the first state in the special gaming state, and the second state in the normal gaming state It can be realized and can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing the configuration of the feature H1.

  Note that for each configuration of the features H1 to H7, any of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G11 It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or to combine the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  The technical idea shown in each invention of each of the features A to H group may be applied to each invention of each of the features A to H group, or some or all of them may be combined to each feature A to H It may be applied to each invention of the H group. Moreover, it is also possible to combine all or one part of the various structure shown to each invention of each feature AH group arbitrarily.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A variable display means is provided to display symbols in the final stop mode after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, and the variation of symbols starts due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop or by the lapse of a predetermined time, the special stop game advantageous to the player as a necessary condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a status (a bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type gaming machine (ball-use rotating-body-type gaming machine): Variable display means for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbol row last stop, resulting from the operation of the starting operation means The variation of symbols is started, and the variation of symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or when the predetermined time elapses, and it is a game that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is the specific symbol To generate a special game state (bonus game etc.) which is advantageous to the player, and further providing a ball saucer and performing an insertion process for taking the game balls from the ball saucer, and paying out the game balls to the ball saucer A gaming machine, comprising: a payout device for performing the game operation, wherein operation of the starting operation means is enabled by the game ball being inserted by the insertion device.

  10: Pachinko machine, 31: general winning opening, 33: upper operation opening, 34: lower operation opening, 97: payout control device, 131: left channel forming portion, 133: first inclined portion, 136: second inclined portion , 141: out port, 161: right side flow path forming section, 163: first inclined section, 166: second inclined section, 171: out port, 201, 301, 401, 501, 802: variable winning device, 321: lower Side out port, 403: first winning opening, 404: second winning opening, 431, 631, 731: opening and closing member, 432: first opening and closing plate, 433: second opening and closing plate, 651: movable plate, 732 ... Shutter part, 735 ... extension part, 803 ... 3rd operation opening.

Claims (8)

A launcher capable of launching game balls to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first ball entry unit and a second ball entry unit provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
The first state in which the gaming ball can not enter or is difficult to enter the first ball entry portion, and the second state in which the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry portion or is easier to enter than the first state And a movable body that can be switched to
Switching control means for executing switching control of changing the movable body from the first state to the second state and then to the first state based on a predetermined trigger;
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player based on the entry of game balls into the respective ball entry portions of the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion;
Equipped with
There is provided a ball receiving portion capable of receiving gaming balls flowing down the gaming area in a situation where the movable body is at least in the first state,
When the movable body switches from the first state to the second state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to be capable of entering the second ball entry portion. A gaming machine to be. When the movable body switches from the first state to the second state, the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion is configured to be dropped downward,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the dropped gaming ball can enter the second ball entry portion.   3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second ball entering portion is disposed below the ball receiving portion and is opened upward.   4. The apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the movable body is rotatable in a predetermined direction, and the switching from the first state to the second state is performed by the rotation. The gaming machine described in. The movable body includes an opening and closing portion capable of opening and closing the first ball entering portion,
5. The ball receiving unit according to claim 4, wherein the ball receiving unit protrudes forward of the game machine beyond the opening and closing unit when the first ball entering unit is in the first state by the opening and closing unit. The gaming machine described. A discharge unit provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising: a lead-out means capable of leading the gaming ball received by the ball receiving unit to the discharge unit side. The lead-out means can lead the game ball received by the ball receiving portion toward the side of the ball receiving portion,
7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the discharge unit is disposed adjacent to the ball receiving unit on the side of the ball receiving unit.   8. The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein the discharging portion is open to the ball receiving portion.

Images